JP2020073246A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of generating a suitable situation when a setting value is set.SOLUTION: A plurality of stages of setting values are set to a Pachinko machine. A winning probability of a jackpot result at least in a low-probability mode varies according to the setting state of the Pachinko machine. For changing the setting state of a Pachinko machine, a setting key is inserted into a setting key insertion part 68a and ON operation is performed, a reset button 68c is pressed, a front door frame is opened, and operating power needs to be started to be supplied to the Pachinko machine in a situation in which a game machine body is opened. When operating power starts to be supplied to the Pachinko machine in a situation in which the conditions are satisfied, setting value update processing is executed by a main-side CPU 63. Different notification is executed depending on whether the setting value is identical before and after the setting value update processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. The game balls, which are guided by the device and become excessive in the upper side dish storage section, are discharged to the lower side dish storage section (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to suitably perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing various controls.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 includes a control means for executing various kinds of processing and temporarily storing information in an internal storage means at the time of executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, various controls can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a front view of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win / win lottery. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables memorized by main side ROM. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special power control process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of a ball detection sensor input into a main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows a ball detection processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by a payment side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a management IC. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I / F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the memory for correspondence. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 8A to 8E are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the output processing of the setting value update signal performed by the main side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows display output processing performed by a management side CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data output process performed by (a) main side CPU, and a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by (b) management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in the main side ROM in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for another preservation | save in 3rd Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a monitoring process of repeated changes executed by the management CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by the main side CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 7th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 8th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows display output processing performed by a management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball detection sensor in 10th Embodiment to the main side CPU and management IC. It is a front view of the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure for performing various displays in the 1st-4th notification display apparatus based on control of MPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display device for 1st-4th notification when the management result of a game history is displayed, (b) in the case where the setting state of a pachinko machine is changed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display device for 1st-4th notification. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display device for 1st-4th notification of (a)-(h) becomes a display state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st notification display apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 2nd notification display apparatus. A first notification display device in the case of displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification displays and in the case of displaying a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine can be changed 6A and 6B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the second notification display device. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the abnormality display area in 13th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing an abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality display performed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the main side CPU in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the program and data of the main side ROM in 15th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used for managing a game history. It is a flow chart which shows the check processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the usual entrance management processing performed by the master side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a result calculation process executed by the main CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management processing performed by the main side CPU in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by the main side CPU in a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main CPU in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by the main CPU in 20th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the electric composition in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 22nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed by the main CPU in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed by the main CPU in 25th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another monitoring process performed by the main side CPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the island facility of the game hall may be equipped with the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side in front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end portion, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and It has a function of locking the door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration on the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window 23 in the resin base 21 is guided by the guide rail to the upper part of the game area PA.

  By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. When one gaming ball is paid out and one gaming ball is thrown into the general winning opening 31, ten winning balls are paid out and the special prize winning device 32 is paid. In the case where one of the game balls has entered, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the out port 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operation ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the second operation port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning in the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by the winning of the through-gate 35, and a general display of the general-purpose unit 38 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Note that the general-purpose display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device is provided. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by turning on the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

  A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  More specifically, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning or lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the winning of the second operating opening 34 as a trigger, whereby a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. As the picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns of upper, middle and lower tiers are set as a plurality of display areas, and each of the symbol columns is numbered "1" to "9". The symbols are scroll-displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol rows is started first, and the scroll display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row, and finally in each symbol row It ends with the pattern still displayed. Then, in the game times where the game result is a big hit result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line that is preset on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the most advantageous jackpot result described later is displayed, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the low-probability jackpot result described later is displayed. If it is a low winning high certainty jackpot result, it is not the same symbol combination, but if it is not a low winning high certainty jackpot result, the symbol combination that is not stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts after the winning is won. Be seen. In addition, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until one of the game times. Equivalent to times. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

  When a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won is performed. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot win, and when the game is transferred to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to the open state in which the game balls can win. It has become. By the way, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration related to the discharge of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  As described above, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. By entering the ball will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that entered the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, or the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed out discharge passages 42 to 48, and to the discharge ball collecting portion (not shown). Be recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulating device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting a game ball are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is formed in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join at the middle position with respect to the two right winning openings 31 on the right side is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and also has one exit side area due to the entrance side areas joining in the middle. is doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the outlet side region of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two right prize holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third prize hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  The fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided so as to correspond to the special electric winning device 32. The special electricity detection sensor 45a is provided so that the detection range exists at the midway position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball that has entered the special electricity winning device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a. The fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided so as to correspond to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharging passage part 46, and the game ball entering the first working port 33 moves the fifth discharging passage part 46. During the passage, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. The sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided so as to correspond to the second operation port 34. The second working port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharging passage part 47, and the game ball that has entered the second working port 34 moves through the sixth discharging passage part 47. During the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the outlet 24a. The outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the outlet 24a is in the middle of passing through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  It should be noted that the game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect a game ball. The various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent. However, the window panel 52 is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulge portion 55 and a lower bulge portion 56 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device to be described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 55a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted. FIG. 5 is a front view of main controller 60.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the board box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. The MPU 62 can be viewed through the facing wall portion 60b.

  The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c in the front and back. The plurality of case bodies 60c prevent separation of the case bodies 60c and traces of the case bodies 60c when they are separated. A coupling portion 60e is provided for leaving. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if the case body 60c is separated by breaking the part of the joint portion 60e in a state where the case body 60c is prevented from being separated by using the part of the joint portion 60e, another case is performed after that. By separating the portion 60e, the case body 60c can be prevented from being separated again. Further, when the case body 60c is separated, the joint portion 60e is destroyed and a trace thereof remains, so that it is possible to visually confirm the joint portion 60e to grasp whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated. It will be possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to one side where the coupling portions 60e are arranged side by side so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. As a result, when the seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

  In the main control device 60 having the above-described configuration, the main control board 61 is owned by the game hall manager in order to give an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion part 68a that is inserted into the setting key and is turned on, an update button 68b that is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and a main controller. A reset button 68c operated to clear data in a main RAM 65 described later provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history. , Are provided. In addition, a connection terminal of the external device is connected to the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 in order to read the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. A reading terminal 68d for reading is provided. The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and any number of stages can be set.

  The setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the reading terminal 68d (that is, the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall 60b. That is, in the facing wall portion 60b, the areas facing the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are individual openings. Thus, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without pressing the board box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c can be pressed. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

  By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. It is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by starting the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). It becomes possible to change. Then, each time the update button 68b is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the ascending order within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6", the setting is updated to "setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the ON operation position and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned OFF. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played in the state of the set value at that time. That is, the set value cannot be changed even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends.

  The ON operation to the setting key insertion portion 68a is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs the ON operation on the setting key insertion portion 68a after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, the setting value cannot be changed.

  The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of n in the “setting n” (n is an integer of “1” to “6”) (that is, the setting). The higher the value, the higher the advantage. Although details will be described later, there are a low-probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as win / loss lottery modes for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the set value is The higher the probability, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is constant regardless of the set value.

  The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to generate the clearing of the data, the reset button 68c is pressed to supply operating power to the pachinko machine 10. Must be started (that is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 must be started). The ON operation to the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 presses the reset button 68c after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

  As described above, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform the external output to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, the operation of the main control device 60 to the MPU 62 is required). It is necessary to start the power supply). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the external output to the external device is not performed.

  Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the display device is not limited to this, and a single multi-color emission type single display. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that the display surface thereof faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c accommodated in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as already described, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, first to third notifications are made through the facing wall portion 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually checked.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers “0” to “9” are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The details of the notification will be described later. Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. The value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Further, the set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is set to the first to third notifications. The display may be displayed on another one of the notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back surface side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a main power source of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power source.

  The control device gathering unit 74 generates and outputs a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, a predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply / launching control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 contains a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main-side ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game history based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is ascertained according to the obtained winning history. Further, the management IC 66 grasps the occurrence frequencies of the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode described later.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 62, the power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected. A power supply / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a has the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and the first working opening detection. The sensor 46a, the second operation port detection sensor 47a, the out port detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a are included. On the basis of the detection results of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines a ball to enter each ball. Further, in the main CPU 63, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion portion 68a provided on the main control board 61, an update button 68b and a reset button 68c are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged in the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. To the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding ball input part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in which the occurrence of a ball has occurred. It Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b for opening / closing the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b for opening / closing the general electric officer 34a of the second operating port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the universal drawing unit 38 are connected. By the way, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a and a special drawing reservation display portion 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal figure unit 38 is provided with a universal figure display section 38a and a universal figure hold display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the drive unit 32b for special electricity so that the special electricity winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric outlet 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric outlet 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display portion 37a. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a. Further, when a winning is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special figure hold display unit 37b. Is executed and a prize is paid to the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started on the general figure display section 38a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure hold display section 38b.

  First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current set value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. Regarding the display on the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 has priority over the display control by the management IC 66.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may have a configuration in which the management IC 66 controls the display and the main CPU 63 does not control the display. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. Good.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the connecting terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 identifies whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 78 and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. As described above, the payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with the power switch, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  The sound emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical structure for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for the main CPU 63 to perform various lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main side CPU63 uses the various counter information at the time of the game, and performs the jackpot occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special symbol display portion 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the general symbol display portion 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery for winning, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when performing, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, and display duration in the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the universal electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 should be in the universal electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a prize is awarded to the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is stored in the holding area RE. In addition, a combination of numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs in succession a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4. By thus providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and starts one game time. At that time, a win / fail judgment is made on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the ordinary electric power holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric outlet 34a to be in the open state based on the stored value of the general electric outlet opening counter C4.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation in which the game balls are continuously fired in the game area PA in the same manner, the general utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state in the ordinary electric lottery using the ordinary electric outlet release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric open state is won is set to a larger number than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is elected and the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time (that is, in the general map The one-time display duration on the display section 38a is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a win is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode to be in the general electric open state per unit time more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the general electric open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state. In addition, a securing time that is ensured when the next ordinary electric train open lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train open lottery is performed (for example, it is executed in the universal map display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time can be selected more easily or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train opening lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train opening lottery is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or a condition of any combination of shortening the averaging time and increasing the winning probability.

  Here, although the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” exist in the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric officer 34a in the low frequency support mode are not limited. The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric officer 34a in at least one of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured. For example, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of opening the general utility product 34a in the low frequency support mode may be, and the second operation in the case where the general utility product 34a is in the open state once in the low frequency support mode. The probability that the game ball enters the mouth 34 may be increased. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the universal utility product 34a in the high-frequency support mode may be, and the second configuration in the case where the universal service object 34a is in the open state once in the high-frequency support mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of entering a game ball into the operating port 34 increases.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.

  The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win / loss table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the win / loss tables, low probability win / loss tables 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and high accuracy win / loss table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

  The low probability hit / miss tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". That is, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". 2 low probability table 64b, the low probability table 64c for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 5", the low probability table 64d for setting 4 referred to when the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 are set. The low probability table 64f for the setting 6 referred to when the setting state of “setting 6” is “setting 6” exists.

  These low certainty win / loss tables 64a to 64f are set so that the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low probability hit table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low probability hit table 64b for setting 2 is referred to, about 1/310. Results in a big hit, and when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, the result is about 1/300. When the low probability table 64d for setting 4 is referenced, the result is approximately 1/290. Results in a big hit, about 1/280 when the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, and about 1/270 when a low accuracy table 64f for setting 6 is referred to. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, the high-probability / non-probability table 64g is provided in only one type so as to be common in any of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The high-probability win / loss table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher than that of the low-probability win / loss tables 64a to 64f in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Specifically, when the highly accurate hit / miss table 64g is referred to, the result of the big hit is about 1/30. As a result, it is possible to make the high-probability mode more advantageous than the low-probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, even in the lowest setting state "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result can be made higher than that in the highest setting state "setting 6" low probability mode by being in the high probability mode. Becomes Further, in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and to suppress the storage capacity for storing the high-accuracy / probability table 64g in the main ROM 64 in advance. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of the opening / closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode of the universal electric accessory 34a of the 2 working port 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, the round game of a predetermined number of times is executed as an upper limit.

  A round game is a game that continues until a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are won in the special electric prize winning device 32 until either condition is satisfied. That is. Further, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, no matter which jackpot result is obtained, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different open durations from the opening of the special electric winning device 32 to the closing. Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been done.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. To be done. Further, the upper limit number of end conditions for the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration time is set to be longer than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, and more specifically, shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will be won by the upper limit number in one round game. It is expected that if the special opening award device 32 is opened once, no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32, or even if a prize is won, the number is one.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are the higher frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. Is.

  The distribution destination of the big hit result to the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h, as shown in FIG. Then, in the distribution table 64h, a low-probability jackpot result, a low winning high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the jackpot results when the jackpot result is obtained.

  The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / winning lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low winning high-accuracy jackpot result is a big hit result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the win / loss lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means not the open / close execution mode but the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as a game result, a low winning high probability jackpot result may not be set. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning high-probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the distribution table 64h, of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the low winning high-probability jackpot result. Corresponding, "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot results.

  Only one kind of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and a storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  The distribution mode of the jackpot results may be different depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result, and a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being assigned to the most advantageous jackpot result or the low winning affirmative jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of becoming the high-probability mode after the jackpot result. In addition, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the low-winning high-accuracy jackpot result may be configured to be low. It may be configured so that it can be distributed to the jackpot results. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode will occur.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Expected effects are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a kind of display effects in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given response result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 The display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, a combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

  Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying the combination of the reach symbols, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol column is included. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , Which includes reducing or displaying the combination of reach patterns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

  In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns, or some symbol columns are plural. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column is included. Further, it also includes a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and a pattern on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

  Reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

  On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made in the sound emission control device 81, not in the main control device 60. In this case, the voice emission control device 81 is more likely to give a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the miss result, and to give a notice display with a low appearance rate. The lottery process for displaying the advance notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that result in the deviation is the same in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that result in the deviation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the reach display will occur in the game times that result in the deviation.

  Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration of the special figure display portion 37a and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display is determined on the special figure display unit 37a and when the variation display of the symbol is started by the symbol display device 41 when the variation pattern is determined.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 for advancing a game will be described. The processes of the main CPU 63 are roughly classified into a main process which is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Then, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned on (step S103). When the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is set to "except" in the main RAM 65 in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. 0 "is cleared (step S105). That is, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning on the setting key insertion unit 68a, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 for setting value information is started. The main RAM 65 is cleared while maintaining the state before the power supply was stopped. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without the need to change the setting value.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored and held data (step S107). .. When the process of step S105 is executed, or when the positive determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the setting value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and abnormal when it is "0" or 7 or more.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after performing the error notification process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of the error (step S109), an infinite loop is formed. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117) described later.

  When a positive determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, power-on setting processing is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. After performing the process of step S110, the management IC 66 recognizes various information (step S111) and outputs various data to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is executed (step S112). Details of the recognition process and the data output process will be described later.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 ends and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

  After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the residual process of steps S113 to S116 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

  In the residual processing, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S115. In these updating processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is performed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S116, the setting of interrupt permission for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. When the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 including the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire RAM 65 on the main side is not operated. The clearing process may be executed without executing the clearing process and when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

  After that, the set value update process is executed in step S118, the set value update signal output process is executed in step S119, and then the process proceeds to step S110. The setting value update process will be described below. The output processing of the set value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process.

  First, "1" is set to the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

  Then, the display start processing of the set value is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  Then, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204) on condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been operated OFF (step S203: NO). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206, or when the process of step S207 is executed, the display update process of the set value is executed (step S208). In the display update process of the set value, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processes of step S204 and thereafter are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S209). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

  First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of the power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed and an infinite loop is executed. Become. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

  After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric auditors article opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the present numerical value information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility open counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical value information is executed. After that, a process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S303, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S114, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S304 as in step S115.

  Then, the fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing from step S307 is executed.

  In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting the various drive units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the general electric power is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Then, the reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

  After that, a ball detection process is executed (step S309). In the entrance detection process, the signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball detection process will be described later.

  After that, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction timer counter update and the addition timer counter update are aggregated and performed. It may be configured.

  Then, the firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed (step S311). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec. In subsequent step S312, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S308, disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and open confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. I do.

  After that, the special figure special electric power control processing for executing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special power control processing will be described in detail later.

  Then, the universal figure / universal control process is executed (step S314). In the general / universal / universal electric power control process, a process for obtaining the general / universal-university-side pending information is executed when a prize is paid to the through gate 35, and the general-universal / universal-side pending information is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the universal figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open / close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, it becomes the low frequency support mode.

  In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, the output information for reflecting the increased / decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display section 37a in the special figure hold display section 37b is set and The output information for reflecting the increased / decreased number of the hold information related to the universal figure display section 38a on the universal figure hold display section 38b is set. In step S315, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is changed. Set the output information for updating.

  After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Also, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S318). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure special power control processing of step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a process of acquiring pending information is executed (step S401). In the process of obtaining the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has been paid to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is used for holding. It is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In addition, when the winning to the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 occurs at the same time, the processing for acquiring the holding information is performed within the range in which the processing for acquiring the holding information is executed once. Run multiple times. Further, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

  After that, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special map special telephone address is acquired from the special figure special telephone address table (step S404), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed. The special figure special telephone address table is The start address of the program for executing the processing of steps S406 to S412 is set in association with the numerical information.

  In step S406, a special figure variation start process is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start processing.

  In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S502) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, the number of reservations is first decremented and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 to the lower area side, and specifically, the second holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1. , The third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3, and the like, and then the fourth holding area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

  After executing the data setting process, the win / loss table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, the information indicating the win / loss lottery mode of the main RAM 65 is read to grasp the current win / loss lottery mode. In the high probability mode, the high probability table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the low-probability table 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped set value is read from the main ROM 64.

  After that, the win / loss determination process is executed by referring to the win / loss tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the hit determination processing, the hit determination information out of the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value information relating to the hit random number counter C1 is set in the hit tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not

  When the result of the win / loss determination process is the jackpot win result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, by referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, which of the low-probability jackpot result, the low winning high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to the jackpot result is specified.

  After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, in the game time related to the start of the variation this time, the information of the aspect of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is read from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. It is specified, and the specified information is written in the main RAM 65. In this big hit result stop result table, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is set differently for each kind of big hit result.

  After that, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, the flag of the distribution determination process of step S506 is selected. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not the jackpot, the stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed (step S509). Specifically, in the game time of the variation start this time, the information of the mode of the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance from the stop result table for the disengagement result. It is specified, and the specified information is written in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After the processing of either step S508 or step S509 is executed, the grasping processing of the duration of the game is executed (step S510). In this processing, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. Specifically, when the game time related to the current fluctuation start is the low-probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, if neither the big hit result nor the numerical value information about the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical value information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach generation continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the continuation period of the game time corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the period. By the way, the duration of the game times that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table.

  The duration of the game times when the reach is not generated is set so that the duration of the game times becomes shorter as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, a shorter duration of the game time is selected as compared with the case where the number of holding information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game times may not change in accordance with the number of pieces of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game game when the reach occurs. Further, the duration table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the missed reach, and the case of the missed result of the non-reach occurrence. In this case, the distribution of the duration of game times is performed according to each game result.

  After that, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). The updating of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer updating process (step S310). By the way, as the effect for the game use, the variable display of the symbol on the special figure display portion 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when each of these variable displays is finished, the game time is changed. In the state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined symbol combination is waiting on the activated line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the duration of the game time acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game time.

  After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the variation command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 81 can specify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information on the duration of the game time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

  When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emission part 53, the speaker part 54, and the symbol display device 41 are caused to execute the game use effect. In this case, the effect for game play is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. Further, in the symbol display device 41, a variable display of symbols is performed as an effect for game use, and when the effect for game use is finished, a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the win / loss determination process and the distribution determination process is displayed. It will be stopped.

  After that, the variable display of the design on the special figure display portion 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numeric information of the special figure special telephone counter is "0" when the special figure variation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special telephone counter is "1". After that, "1" is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that the game time has started is executed for the management IC 66.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), the special figure changing process is executed in step S407. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game time, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display portion 37a is ruled. Process for changing the target. At the time of the final stop display, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the special figure changing process. Update to stuff. In this embodiment, the main CPU 63 does not send the final stop command to the sound emission control device 81.

  In step S408, the processing for confirming the special figure is executed. In the special figure finalizing process, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. Further, in the special figure finalization process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. When the shift to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0". When a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric power supply start processing from the one corresponding to the special electric power supply start processing. Update.

  In step S409, special electric power start processing is executed. In the special electric power start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current open / close execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. If the opening period has elapsed, the starting process for starting the first round game is executed. In the starting process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and the ending condition of the round game is set. In setting this end condition, the upper limit duration time for continuing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the special electric prize device 32 can be won in the first round game of this time. The upper limit number of game balls is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65.

  In step S410, the special electric power releasing processing is executed. In the special electric current open process, it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. When the ending condition is satisfied, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game that has ended this time is not the final round game of the execution time, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the special electric open processing to the special electric closing processing. If the round game ended this time is the round game of the last execution, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is incremented by 2 to correspond to the special electric open processing. Update from the one that corresponds to the special telephone end processing.

  In step S411, a special electric power closing process is executed. In the special electric closed processing, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has passed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the ending condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special electric power closing processing to that corresponding to the special electric open processing.

  In step S412, special electric power ending processing is executed. In the special electric power ending process, if the process for starting the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode this time is not yet executed, the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. By receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to the mode corresponding to the jackpot result which triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34 and the through. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball enters the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can simultaneously handle eight types of signals. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC in order to limit the types of signals that are input simultaneously to eight types. It is switched through switching control.

  In the incoming ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation where the setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electricity detection sensor 45a. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  When the passage of the game ball is not detected, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal as a detection signal indicating that the game ball is not being detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In that case, a HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving the LOW level signal, and "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving the HI level signal. Stores the information of. That is, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating the detection is stored for the corresponding bit.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, one piece is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S602), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). .. The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 10 award balls is 1 or more, the 10 award ball command is output to the payout controller 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 award balls are issued. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electricity winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S611), and "1" is set to the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S612). The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize device 32 in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric power control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the special electric prize winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining possible number of balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of possible balls to enter is executed, the special electric prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The counter for 15 prize balls is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are also displayed. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 such that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one gaming ball should be paid out. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and "1" is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Then, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operating port 34. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”, and the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The sixth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the universal communication control processing (step S314) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and the universal communication stored in the universal communication holding area 65c is confirmed. A process of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility accessory release counter C4 in the general electric power holding area 65c as the general-purpose-side holding information, provided that the number of pieces of the holding information on the side is less than the upper limit of 4. To execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the universal figure control process (step S314), and the gate winning flag is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated in a 4 msec cycle as already described, when the detection of one game ball is started by one of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the ball is entered. In the situation where the detection sensor 42a to 49a continues to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 specifies that the game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a has detected one game ball. Done. Therefore, it suffices if each one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

  Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 16.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 has a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, a non-volatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is randomly accessible and has a shorter read time than the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. Upon receipt of the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the payout of the game balls can be normally performed, and when it is specified that the payout of the game balls is not normally possible, the payout side RAM 94 is displayed. The payout device 76 is stopped even in the situation where the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the normal payout is not possible. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform a notification indicating that the payout of gaming balls cannot be normally performed. As described above, the notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. As a state in which it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, the lower plate 56a is filled with the game balls, the tank 75 is not filled with the game balls, and the payout device 76 is provided. Is not operating normally, there is a payout abnormal state, a main body opened state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door opened state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  An unillustrated full tank detection sensor is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is in a full state when the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that there is no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no detection sensor is released. Specify that the ball-free state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in the payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormal state has been released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95, and when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door opening command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closing state when receiving the front door closing command.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 sends an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the opening sensor 96, and the gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 sends a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at a timing. The main CPU 63 identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state when receiving the body opening command, and identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the closing state when receiving the body closing command.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is in the full state based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank, the process for stopping the payout of the game balls. And sends a command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is released, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and at the same time, a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the ball non-use process is executed (step S702). In the ball non-use processing, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is no ball based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor. Along with the execution, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-sphere state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-sphere state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the payout abnormality monitoring processing is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout state is abnormal based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and when the payout state is abnormal, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Also, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Then, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of the game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, processing for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and when the game machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball The process of stopping the payout of the main body is executed and the main body opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted from the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting processing for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. The payout control process for controlling the execution of is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S709).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals. Some external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals are provided. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this manner, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

  For details of the main body opening sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branching path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and one game time have ended. Information indicating that, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. The information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, the information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and the information that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 gaming balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game balls in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. For example,
・ The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
-Ball output rate in open / close execution mode-ball output rate in high frequency support mode-number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is "S")
B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33, which has occurred until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
-The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 that have occurred until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B- (S1 x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first working port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second working port 34")
The probability of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit game time, the probability of occurrence of the high frequency support mode per unit game time, etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball input section.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. Further, the MPU 62 is provided with the I / F 101 in addition to these, and is also provided with the reading terminal 68d already described.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from a device external to the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection result from the sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the command from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection result and the content of the command. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of the various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of the I / F 101, and When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of the CPU 63 performing various processes, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, and a calculation result memory 131. Is equipped with. These respective devices are connected to each other through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d via the. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management-side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management-side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via the bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management-side CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. This is a possible configuration. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for storage and storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  The calculation result memory 131 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. Is low level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  The second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level second signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  The third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of the HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

  The fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. And outputs a fourth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first working opening detection sensor 46a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  The sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU63 outputs the 6th signal of LOW level in the situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second working port detection sensor 47a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  The seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. In that case, the seventh signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether the open / close execution mode is in operation is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal of LOW level in the situation not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal of HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in operation is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation not in the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation in the high-frequency support mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. And output.

  The eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not the game time has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 11th signal of LOW level before the game time is started, and outputs the 11th signal of HI level for a specific period when the game time is started. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  A set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the main CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not newly set, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In addition, the HI level set value update signal is output for the number of pulse signals corresponding to the newly set set value for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

  The 16th buffer 122p includes an output instruction signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. Is entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when history information needs to be output. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

  Although the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can input signals from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 is a blank in which normal signals are not input. As described above, as the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p, which are larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, are provided. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

  Whether the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 is received. Instead, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when the control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 with the start of the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main-side CPU 63 controls the management-side CPU 112. This is performed by transmitting a type identification command to the. In this case, the information of the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management side CPU 112 in the situation where the operating power is supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. It is provided.

  In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, together with information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31, information on the number of gaming balls paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) Is stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 are also provided. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) of the number of gaming balls paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 Is stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information (15 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 are also included. Is stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, together with information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, information on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operation port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, information indicating that the game time has started is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management-side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m in the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored.

  As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management-side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main-side CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

  Also, instead of outputting the information for recognizing the type of the signal each time the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. Information for outputting the information for specifying the type of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n based on the output information to the management CPU 112 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. It is a configuration. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when the game is started on the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

  Further, information setting that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the set value update signal and the output instruction signal that are surely used not only by the pachinko machine 10 but also by other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66 can be used for the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is possible to omit the processing for specifying the type of signal input to the. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is assigned. When it is necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k) First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target.

  Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, the signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to each of the ball detecting sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31, these first to third winning holes Information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a. In addition, information indicating that it is the special electricity winning device 32 is stored in the fourth correspondence area 123d, and information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e. Information indicating the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f, and information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g. When the buffers 122a to 122n that have triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the first. The information on the type of the ball entering portion read out from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input, and a signal indicating whether or not the game time has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open / close execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating the game time is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in the situation where the open / close execution mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation where the open / close execution mode is set. The side CPU 112 identifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, regardless of whether the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open / close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h, but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open / close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information is recorded together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is set. The managing CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that it did. Then, regardless of whether the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area. It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. Further, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information together with the history information storage area It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Since the continuous output is performed, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game time start timing, and when the game time start timing is reached, the HI level eleventh signal is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the game time has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating the game time read from the eleventh correspondence relation area 123k is stored as the correspondence relation information in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the game balls are continuously emitted from the pachinko machine 10 from the opening to the closing of the store. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, 600,000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for identifying the pointer information, which is the current write target in the history memory 117, by the management CPU 112. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of “0” as a writing target. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information, the pointer information of “0” is set as the write target. The information in the usage area 126 is updated. As a result, when a history information storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of history information items that can be stored, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, all the history information storage area 125 is cleared to “0” and the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that was once the read target from being read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  First, "14" is set to the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The output counter for recognition recognizes which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 of the management I / F 111 correspond to, and outputs the remaining information output for the management CPU 112 to recognize. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As already described, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are targets of signal type recognition, so "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

  Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main-side CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management-side CPU 112 so that the management-side CPU 112 can recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a are used. Command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to 122n. This reduces the number of signal paths as compared with a configuration in which the signal path for performing the command output is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

  After that, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n so that the signal type is set first and then the n + 1th buffer is set to the signal type setting next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is “14” to “12”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “11”, the special prize winning is awarded. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “10”, the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out. If the recognition output counter is "9", it is the second operation port 34, and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is "8", it is the out port 24a. The type identification command indicated is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "7", the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read out and the recognition output counter indicates If it is “6”, the type identification command indicating the high-frequency support mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is “5”, the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If the value is "4", the type identification command indicating the game time is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "3" to "1", the type identification command indicating the blank is read out.

  After that, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similarly to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command to the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Information to be stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S806). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction of 1 is executed (step S803 and Step S804).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 identifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, the management processing executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is higher than that of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started after the main CPU 63 starts one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). By the time the process starts, the combination of the processes from step S908 onward in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

  First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). When the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the setting update recognition process is executed (step S902), and the process returns to step S901. Although details will be described later, in the setting update recognition process, when the main CPU 63 newly sets the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding process is executed.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122n for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the target for setting the signal type first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the target for setting the signal type after the nth buffer.

  After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence relation setting process, of the first to fourteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence relation memory 116, in the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114, the type identification received this time is identified. Stores the signal type information set in the command. Then, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

  If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the processing of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 are executed. Execute the process again.

  When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processes of steps S908 to S910 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later, in step S908, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. Although details will be described later, in step S909, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display output processing for executing. In step S910, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d, which will be described in detail later, is executed.

  FIG. 24 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 24A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). FIG. 24 (b) shows a period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 24D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 24D shows the timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S905).

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. It At the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24 (b). The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the information of. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S901 of the management processing (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Then, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 24 (b). After that, at the timing of t5 in which the output of the type identification command is continued, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are identified. By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence relationship setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  After that, in each of the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, similarly to the timing of t4 to the timing of t6, Correspondence relationship setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed from the timing t16 to the timing t18.

  After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t20 in which the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are identified. By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the configuration is made such that the management CPU 112 recognizes whether or not the command is output using the ninth signal, so that the management CPU 112 can be instructed to store history information. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clear to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to recognize.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, "11" is set to the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies, by the main CPU 63, whether or not there is a management target that is not a target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which management target should be changed in the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In the one-time management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not to change the signal output state to the management-side CPU 112. The management targets are seven ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 whether the open / close execution mode is executed, the high-frequency support mode is executed, the front door frame 14 is opened / closed, and the game time is started. Therefore, “11” is first set in the managed counter.

  After that, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is the HI level (step S1002). If it is not at the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter is 5 or more, so that the entry detection sensors 42a having seven managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed counter are detected. To 48a are specified (step S1003).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag, When the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "8". If it corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7", and the first working opening detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to, the fifth output flag is "1" It is determined whether or not it is set, and if the value of the managed counter is "6" and it corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a, then "6" is set in the sixth output flag. If the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the outlet 24a, it is determined whether the seventh output flag is set to "1". As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the entry detection process (FIG. 15).

  When "1" is set to the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. Is set (step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “4”, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is “3”, it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is “2”, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the managed counter When the value is "1", it is determined whether or not the game time is started by determining whether or not "1" is set in the eleventh output flag. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). If the process of step S1008 is executed when the value of the managed counter is "1", the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game time, the first to seventh signals Then, it is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter in the eleventh signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. When the value of the managed counter is "4" and the current managed object is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed counter is "3". When the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is “2”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is closed. When the trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the process of step S1006 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process of step S1008 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1012). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processing from step S1002 is executed on the management target corresponding to the new value of the management target counter.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, of the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than the information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. Set the information of the number you did in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores the information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so that "11" is set in the check target counter in step S1101. To do.

  After that, it is necessary to confirm whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122n are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh buffer 122k is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. ..

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. If the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open / close execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123n is the target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh correspondence relationship area 123k is the target for reading the correspondence relationship information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence relationship area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

  By performing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the game times. If it is, the RTC information, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second opening are stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the corresponding information indicating that the operation port 34 is one of the game times and the combination is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the check target counter is one of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating any one of the front door frames 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  After that, the update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1105). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process of step S1105 is executed, it is determined whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j have the information indicating the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode. Since either the information indicating that there is the information or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, a positive determination is made in step S1106.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1107, RTC information is read out (step S1108) as in step S1103, and writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is the writing target. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is dealt with. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being. After that, similar to step S1105, the target pointer update processing is executed (step S1110).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1106, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or when the processing of step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1112). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process from step S1102 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27A shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and FIG. 27B shows the HI level signal to the eighth buffer 122h. 27 (c) shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27 (d) shows a HI level signal in the tenth buffer 122j. 27 (e) shows the timing of writing history information in the history memory 117.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 27A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27A. However, the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a target for storing history information. At the timing, the history information is not written as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, the history information is written as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing t4, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, the execution period of the open / close execution mode can be grasped.

  Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence / absence of occurrence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing of t8 when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped.

  Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is displayed even in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered is in the high frequency support mode.

  As illustrated in FIG. 27D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing of t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes end information. As a result, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is opening the front door frame 14. It is possible to distinguish whether or not it is. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is during opening of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the output process of the set value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. The output process of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As described above, the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the output processing of the set value update signal is processing for causing the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main processing (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, the input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the set value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the processing is executed, it becomes possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the decrement is 1 is "0". It is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value update signal is kept at the LOW level for a predetermined period while a plurality of pulses in which the set value update signal becomes the HI level is output. Is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. It is set (step S1205).

  Then, "20" is set to the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when outputting one pulse. This HI level maintaining period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  When the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the decrement by 1 is set to "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). When the value of the HI level counter is “0” (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, and therefore the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. It is set (step S1209).

  After that, the value of the pulse number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1211). When the value of the pulse number counter is not “0” (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. Since it means that there is not, "20" is set to the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the LOW level is maintained for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the value of the pulse number counter is “0” (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the output processing of the setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same manner as the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command.

  As described above, in the output processing of the set value update signal, the pulse signals of the set value update signals corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the operating power this time are output to the management IC 66. To do. The management side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals by the set value update signal by executing the setting update recognition process, and grasps the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on it.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process of step S1304 is executed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). When a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1308). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by executing the setting update recognition process as described above, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the setting. A combination of set values when the setting is performed is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Thus, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting is performed by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 by using the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d. It becomes possible to grasp the contents of the set value when it is performed.

  Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased, and various parameters described later are the change timing of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It is calculated using the history information existing before and after. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, it is stored in the history memory 117 by connecting an external device to the reading terminal 68d. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during the period when the setting state is maintained.

  Next, the display output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, it is determined whether it is the calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the affirmative determination was made last time in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, various numbers of normally entered balls are calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlets 24a is stored, Calculate the number of balls entered. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the entry into the general winning opening 31 is achieved. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the special electric prize winning apparatus 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the special electric prize winning apparatus 32 is allowed to enter the ball. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 is stored. Calculate the number of balls entered. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the second operation ports 34 is stored, Calculate the number of balls entered.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in a period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out door generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, respectively, the number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1403). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of incoming balls for the section is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information and the end information indicating the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as when the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number of entered balls K1, and the number of general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1402 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls received K2, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K3, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 is entered. With the number K4, the second calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1402. The difference between the ball entrance number of Doguchi 34 and ball entrance number K5.
First parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning in the prize ”+ K5 ד number of prize balls for winning in the second working opening 34) / total number of game balls discharged from the technique area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is “ D1 ")
-Second parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K2 into the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the game area PA-Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Of the total number of entered balls K3 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) -Fourth parameter: Total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K4 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
・ Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K5 entering second operation port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
-Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 x "number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34") / total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of game balls (K2 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" ]) Ratio Step S1404 Which stores the first to eighth parameter is the operation result to the normal storage area for the time of the operation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. That is, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal time storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal-time storage area are overwritten.

  After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the outlet 24a and the general winning opening 31 generated in the opening / closing execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1405). A history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open / close execution mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of incoming balls for the section is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence relationship information and the end information indicating the open / close execution mode, the correspondence relationship information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open / close execution mode.

  After that, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the opening 24a generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as the case of step S1403, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1405 and step S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following eleventh to eighteenth parameters are calculated by using the respective incoming ball numbers after the subtraction. In addition, the difference between the number of entered balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1406 and the number of entered balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of entered balls K11, and the winning of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1405. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls received, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1406 is calculated with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1405. The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K13, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The number K14 is calculated and calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of incoming balls of the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: total payout number of game balls (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning the prize ”+ K15 ד number of prize balls for winning the second operation port 34) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is “ D11 ")
・ Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 into the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. ・ Thirteenth parameter: game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32. Ratio of the total number of entered balls K13 / the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. The 14th parameter: the total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K14 / discharged from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
-Sixteenth parameter: D11- (D12 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
Seventeenth parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34") / total payout number of gaming balls (K12 x "general “Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31” + K13 × “Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33” + K15 × “Second operating port 34” 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of gaming balls (K12 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34" )) In step S1407, the first to eighteenth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for the open / close execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed and the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighteenth parameters are stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area. The previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area are overwritten.

  After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the outlet 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the high frequency support mode. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of incoming balls for the section is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

  After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that are generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Then, the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in the case of step S1403, except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1408 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K23, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. The number K24 is calculated and calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of incoming balls of the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning in the prize ”+ K25 ד number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is D11 ")
-Twenty-second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K22 to the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) discharged from the game area PA-Twenty-third parameter: game ball to special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K23 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) -The 24th parameter: the total number of entered game balls K24 into the first operating port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
Twenty-fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
-Twenty-sixth parameter: D21- (D22 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are overwritten.

After that, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, the opening / closing execution mode is calculated. The number of occurrences of is calculated. Further, the number of times the game times have occurred is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game times have started is stored in the history area 117 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated per unit game time is calculated. The number of times the open / close execution mode is generated is K31, and the number of times the game is played is K32.
・ Thirty-first parameter: K31 / K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the storage area for opening / closing execution mode frequency in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. That is, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the storage area for opening / closing execution mode, so that the opening / closing execution mode until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Then, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 storing the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode, Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. Further, the number of times the game times have occurred is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game times have started is stored in the history area 117 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode are calculated. The number of times the high frequency support mode is generated is K41, the number of times the game is played is K42, and the number of times the open / close execution mode is calculated in step S1411 is K43.
41st parameter: K41 / K42
42nd parameter: K41 / K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode frequency in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode frequency are overwritten.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process of step S1412 is executed, the display process is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display processing.

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that it is time to update the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to thereby control the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. The parameters and the calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the numeral corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the numeral corresponding to the ones digit is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. And in the 1st-3rd notification display devices 69a-69c, said 1st-8th parameter, said 11th-18th parameter, said 21st-26th parameter, said 31st parameter and said 41st-. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display object in the final order, is displayed, the display object in the first order is displayed. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not the timing has come (step S1502). When a positive determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

  The display target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter, which is the first display target, is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In the case of, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1504, or if the process of step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It is controlled (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in step S1506 and step S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped. It Then, the value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

  When the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. To be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display device 69a is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~ 69c.

  The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. To be done. In this case, like the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the information corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the display of the information corresponding to the setting value is performed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The display of the management result of is started after the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. Accordingly, even if the third notification display device 69c is also used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying the management result of the game history, display of these displays It is possible to prevent the periods from overlapping.

  When the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are hidden. On the other hand, when the game history management result is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

  Next, regarding a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62 explain. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not the connection signal indicating that the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). When a negative determination is made in step S1601, this data output process is ended as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. As a result, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Need to Since a power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the dispensing mechanism section 73 mounted on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, these stopping and starting operations are performed. In order to do so, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. With the configuration that needs to be performed, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an operation of reading the history information and various parameters even if a person other than the game hall manager performs the operation.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1601, it is decided whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 68d, so that the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is checked (step S1602). The external device has a configuration that allows both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters.If confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation on the external device, the external device will A signal for control information confirmation is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the control information confirmation external device and the history confirmation external device may be separate. In this case, when an external device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for control information confirmation is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for history confirmation is transmitted to the reading terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1602, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it is confirmed whether the control information is authentic or normal. It becomes possible to do.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes the process for outputting the history information.

  Specifically, when the management-side CPU 112 switches the output state of the output instruction signal input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the information of the management result of the game history can be analyzed. Further, when the management-side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, it clears the history memory 117 by "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

  Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32A), when the process of step S1603 is executed or the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is continued. It is determined whether it has been done (step S1605). If it continues (step S1605: YES), the process stands by in step S1605. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), this data output process ends.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the player is required to play one of these entering portions. A game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In the configuration, a game ball enters the any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target entering portion). When the occurrence occurs, the history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history-targeted ball entering unit, and use this managed information. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into each history target entering part. Further, by storing and holding the history information in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  All the ball-in units for ejecting the game balls from the game area PA are targets for execution of storage processing of history information and management targets using history information. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history-target ball entry section by using the history information. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history-targeted ball entering portion that has caused the history information to be stored. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp the entry history of the game ball into the history entry ball portion in detail.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the history target entry portion, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, and the high frequency support mode in effect. History information indicating whether or not, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the game sphere enters the history target ball-in part by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations exists.

  It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it becomes possible to read the history information with the external device and analyze the entering mode of the game ball into the history target entering part by using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output by using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  The information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is specified as a program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output by using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program, it is determined whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to read out only the necessary information even if the reading terminal 68d is also used.

  Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is the program or the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of the information to be output to the outside from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

  The main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. A management CPU 112 is provided separately from the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a and the signal paths corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, respectively, to the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether the open / close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open, And the information corresponding to the start of the game time is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each of the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112, correspondence information indicating which type of information each of the buffers 122a to 122k (that is, each of the signal paths 118a to 118k) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation in which a game ball may enter the history-targeted ball entrance portion, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-targeted ball entrance portion. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence relationship information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball portion. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the history target entrance part corresponding to the information of the transmission target. Eliminates the need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal, without receiving the correspondence information from the main-side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been. As a result, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, the correspondence information indicating the type of the history-target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entering mode of the game ball into each history target entering part by using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh parameter, eleventh parameter) corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. ~ 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. Then, various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the results of calculations using the history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to understand the entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

  When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to the external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear process of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. It becomes possible to make it difficult to generate.

  When the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to that is performed through the external terminal board 97, and history information is stored in the history memory 117. .. With this, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal board 97, the history while easily grasping the number and the frequency of entering the game balls into the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls and the frequency of entering the game balls into the history target ball entering unit.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, while the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is set by the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the condition. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since it is possible to make the high probability table 64g referred to in the high probability mode common in any of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to previously set the table 64a to 64g in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

  The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6", while the distribution mode of the types of jackpot results depends on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change accordingly. As a result, the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be limited to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since it is possible to make the distribution table 64h that is referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results common to any of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for storing in advance.

  Even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but stored and retained. As a result, even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be stored for a long time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information accumulated in 117.

  Even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, in the configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but stored and retained, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. When the process is performed, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the history information after the new setting.

  When the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 by newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the information corresponding to the set value is included in the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  When various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference and the history information stored after that is used. Then, it may be configured to calculate various parameters. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed can be derived as various parameters.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117, and history information corresponding to a change of the set value is used as a reference. Alternatively, various parameters may be calculated using history information stored after that. In this case, it is possible to derive, as various parameters, the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  Although the board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is provided on the opposite wall 60b. It may be configured to be covered by. In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the hit / miss table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the main ROM 64, a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area. 166 are provided. In the setting 1 area 161, the low probability table 161a for setting 1 referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high probability table 161b for setting 1, which is referred to when the setting state of "is 1" and the winning / winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored. In the setting 2 area 162, the low probability table 162a for setting 2 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. And the highly probable hit / miss table 162b for the setting 2 which is referred to when the win / win lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the setting 3 area 163, the low probability table 163a for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high-probability / probability table 163b for setting 3, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 3” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored.

  In the setting 4 area 164, the low probability table 164a for setting 4 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4" and the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high probability table 164b for setting 4, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 4” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored. In the setting 5 area 165, the low-probability / probability table 165a for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The high-probability / probability table 165b for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 5” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored. In the setting 6 area 166, the low probability table 166a for setting 6 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The high probability table 166b for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state is “setting 6” and the winning / winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low certainty win / loss tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low-probability / probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, a big hit result is about 1/320, and when the low-probability / probability table 162a for setting 2 is referred to, about 1/310. Results in a big hit, about 1/300 when the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, and about 1/290 when a low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referenced. Results in a big hit, about 1/280 when the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, and about 1/270 when a low accuracy table 166a for setting 6 is referred to. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high-probability winning / losing tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high-probability / probability table 161b for setting 1 is referenced, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high-probability / probability table 162b for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/40. Results in a big hit, about 1/35 when the high-accuracy hit / miss table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, and about 1/30 when the high-accuracy hit / miss table 164b for setting 4 is referred to Results in a big hit, and when the high-accuracy hit / miss table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/25. When the high-accuracy hit / miss table 166b for setting 6 is referred, it is about 1/20. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high set value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode becomes higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes higher. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode becomes “Setting 1”. Although the configuration is common in any of the setting states of “setting 6”, in the present embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are pachinko. The higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage with respect to the fact that a high set value is set.

  In addition, even if the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode in the case of the highest setting state "setting 6", the winning of the jackpot result in the high probability mode in the case of the lowest setting state "setting 1" It is set lower than the probability. This makes it possible to prevent the player's advantage when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" from becoming extremely low, and also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting". It is possible to prevent the player's advantage in the case of “6” from becoming extremely high.

  On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one sort table 64h is provided so as to be common regardless of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and a storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, whereas the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The set value may be lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is to the setting value, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is to the setting value. It becomes possible.

  Further, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The configuration may be constant in the setting state of "." In this case, in the high-probability mode, the higher the set value of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous the setting value for the player, and in the low-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the handling of the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information in addition to the memories in the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and is used for both reading and writing.

  The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. Information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in these first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, more specifically, the first embodiment. The various parameters described in (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, every time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the n-th type. The areas to be stored are switched such that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n + 1) th storage areas 172 to 176 are changed. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, the various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, various parameters until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased when the number of times exceeds five. It will be remembered.

  The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S1802). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process of step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). When a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1805, repeated change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). Although the details of the repeated change monitoring process will be described later, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 every time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is performed for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as to be erased automatically. On the other hand, by repeatedly performing the change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is performed.

  After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S1807). In various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth parameters) are utilized by utilizing the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. ~ 42nd parameter) is calculated.

  After that, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the area to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for allowing the management-side CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. Information of the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage area is changed to the area of the next order. Will be updated. By executing the process of step S1808, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  After that, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

  After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1812). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further judged whether or not the grasped number of game times is within a reference number (specifically 100 times).

  When a positive determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage as already described, the external storage does not require power supply for storage and storage of the repeated change counter value.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number of times is the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing of repeated changes is executed (step S1904). In the display process of the repeated change, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. It is the display content of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is the display content that displays “E” on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the display content of the repeated change is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repeat change flag is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repeat change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeated change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display process in the first embodiment described above. (FIG. 31) is not executed. After that, "1" is set to the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter of the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). After that, on condition that "1" is set in the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171, (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeat change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is ended (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. Thereby, it becomes possible to leave the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117.

  When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history by using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is erased when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by the history information to be erased. It will be possible.

  In a configuration in which various parameters are calculated by using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored in a separate storage memory. 171 is stored. As a result, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Since the plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 are provided in the separate storage memory 171, it becomes possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of the setting state for a plurality of times. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing when the new setting of the setting state is performed. Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated in a situation where the game is not played, various parameters calculated using history information of the situation where the game is practically played are It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171.

  The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 every time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is performed for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as to be erased automatically. On the other hand, by repeatedly performing the change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the administrator or the like that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  Notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period is performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time. It is possible to make a notification.

  In a situation in which it is necessary to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change are continuously displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The notification of the game history management result at the normal time is not performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues, a corresponding notification may be executed. Further, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, or a predetermined operating area). In the situation where the total number of discharged game balls entered in (combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is made continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, the event that the new setting is performed is notified when the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the number exceeds the reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

  In addition, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding the notification reference value within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), the corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times and the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to that is executed, the set value is changed in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when an event exceeds the notification reference value and continues, notification corresponding to the event is executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times and the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to that is executed, the new setting is triggered when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number of times. When the events in which the various parameters are calculated exceed the notification reference value and continue, a corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times and the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to the above is executed, the progress of the game may be restricted in addition to or instead of that for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the monitoring process of repeated changes is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the repeated change monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value updating process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the change monitoring process is repeatedly executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the monitoring process of the change is repeatedly executed when the set value is changed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number (specifically 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of game times executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 newly executes the game times. Each time, the value of the game number counter is incremented by 1. The game number counter is excluded from the target of "0" clear even when the clear process (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from the target of clearing “0” even when the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number of times is the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, "1" is set to the repeat change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repetitive change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repetitive change should be notified. The repetitive change flag is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even when the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). After that, on condition that the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeated change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

  In the repeated change monitoring process, when "1" is set in the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2008: YES), the repeated change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the notification command of the repeated change, the sound display control device 81 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 to notify the repeated change. The notification of the repeated change is continued until the supply of operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, even if the gaming machine body 12 is not opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. It becomes possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In addition, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification command of the repeated change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81 when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, A configuration may be adopted in which external output corresponding thereto is performed.

  Further, the main CPU 63 may execute the repeated change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 may execute the repeated change monitoring process in the third embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether or not new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition processing in the management CPU 112 is different from that in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S2102). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2103, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2103 or when the process of step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). When a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not there is a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further judged whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically 100 times). However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 storing the correspondence information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is a reference number (specifically, 1000). It may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not the value exceeds. Correspondence information indicating that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined combination). It may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not the total number of history information items stored in the history memory 117 (specifically, 1000) is exceeded.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues, a corresponding notification may be executed. Further, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, or a predetermined operating area). In the situation where the total number of discharged game balls entered in (combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is made continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, the event that the new setting is performed is notified when the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the number exceeds the reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth parameters) are utilized by utilizing the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. ~ 42nd parameter) is calculated.

  After that, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the areas to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for allowing the management-side CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. Information of the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage area is changed to the area of the next order. Will be updated. By executing the process of step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

  After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the write processing, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target, and the pointer information corresponding to the write target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

  Then, the target pointer update process is executed (step S2112). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is stored in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the information of the management result of the game history as a result of the game being substantially played is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It becomes possible to be stored.

  Note that the process of step S2109 may be executed on condition that the processes of steps S2107 and S2108 are executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased, provided that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information about the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information about the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141f to 144f of each of the areas 141 to 144. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 14th counters 141n to 144n of each area 141 to 144.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, of the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than the information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. Set the information of the number you did in the check target counter. In the present pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S2201.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which the signal of the status information is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, as correspondence information, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the open / close execution mode is set is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is stored in the RAM 114 and is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the second state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is provided to the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2202, or when the process of step S2203 is executed, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is displayed. , And whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level by checking whether or not it has been changed from "0" to "1" ( Step S2204). In addition, when the numerical value information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. Information of the first state is stored in the management side RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. Information of the second state is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical value information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the third state is stored in the management RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding summing counter addition processing is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n for summing in the summing area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the total eleventh counter 141k is the addition target, and if the check target counter value is “5”, the total fifth counter 141e is the addition target, If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a will be the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding addition process of the counter for the first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the addition target.

  After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is the addition target.

  After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the addition processing of the corresponding counter for the third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is the addition target.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2204, a negative determination is made in step S2210, or when the processing of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process from step S2202 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of game balls entered into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, and the opening / closing execution The number of times the mode is generated, the number of times the high-frequency support mode is generated, and the number of times the game is generated are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number-of-times information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  With such a configuration that the number of times information is stored instead of the history information, it is not necessary to perform the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Next, the setting update recognition processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S2302). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2303, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the processing of step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, the total eleventh counter 141k for measuring the number of times the game times are executed in the total area 141 in the history memory 117, and the opening / closing execution in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 The eighth total counter 141h measuring the number of times of mode occurrence and the total ninth counter 141i measuring the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 are respectively provided. "0" is cleared (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, the number information of the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode is generated are cleared to "0" when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. To be done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times the high frequency support mode is generated per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are set in the set state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. By making it correspond to the game content after the new setting of, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, in the history memory 117, the counters other than the total eighth counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k are " 0 ”is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history target ball entrance unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the number of game balls entered into the outlet 24a, the general prize hole 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated, and high frequency support. The number of times the mode is generated and the number of times the game is generated are stored as the number-of-times information instead of being stored as the history information as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  Further, since the number of pieces of information is stored as the number-of-times information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to perform the process of deriving the number-of-times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Each piece of information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode has been generated is cleared to "0" when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been performed. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times the high frequency support mode is generated per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are set in the set state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. By making it correspond to the game content after the new setting of, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, in the history memory 117, the counters other than the total eighth counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k are " 0 ”is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history target ball entrance unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  The configuration of the history memory 117 as in the present embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after the present embodiment. For example, when applied to the above-described first embodiment, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

  In addition, the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 may be executed in the processing for setting update recognition (FIG. 41) when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the set value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of times the game is executed, information on the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated, and high-frequency support The information of the number of times the mode is generated is not cleared to "0", and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information of the number of times of the game time, the information of the number of times of the opening and closing execution mode, and the high frequency support mode It is possible to clear the information of the number of occurrences of “0”.

  Further, in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed, and the parameters are calculated. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to "setting 1", and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to "setting 2". A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to “setting 3”, a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to “setting 4”, and corresponding to “setting 5”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

  Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the history information in association with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the set value for which the new setting is performed are the storage targets of the history information. The history information can be stored separately for each set value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  In addition, in each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment are provided. The combination may be set.

  Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to "1" (step S2402). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6". Further, in the present embodiment, since the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing data, is provided with the set value grasping counter, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. Also, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored and held.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the value of the set value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 is incremented by 1 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2403 or when the processing of step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). When a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the values of the set value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as the storage targets of the history information and the reference targets when the various parameters are calculated ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “1”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 1”. Therefore, the history memory 181 for setting 1 is set to the storage target of history information and various parameters. Set as a reference target during calculation. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “2”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 2”. Therefore, the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “3”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 3”. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “4”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 4”. Therefore, the history memory 184 for setting 4 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “5”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 5”. Therefore, the history memory 185 for setting 5 is set in the history information storage target and when various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is set to "setting 6". Therefore, the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target.

  Then, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 that are the storage objects, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing object is specified and becomes the writing object. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information. Further, the information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

  Then, the update process of the target pointer is executed (step S2409). In the update processing, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from among the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are selected. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, as the history memory 117, the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided so as to correspond to the “setting 1” to the “setting 6”, respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to store the game history in association with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the set value for which the new setting is performed are the storage targets of the history information. The history information can be stored separately for each set value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  It should be noted that the history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the six history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided, and one memory can be used for the setting 1 Corresponding to the history memory 181 for setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and a history memory 184 for setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, when the history information is stored using one of the history memories 191 and 192 of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. If a certain number of pieces of history information are stored in the other history memories 191 and 192, the history information in one of the history memories 191 and 192 is not erased and remains. In addition to the above, it is possible to newly store history information in both history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 or 192. Become.

  Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to " 1 ”(step S2502). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2503, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2503, or when the processing of step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). When a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

  When a positive determination is made in step S2505, "1" is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as a storage target of history information until then in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a flag for the management-side CPU 112 to specify whether not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memories 191 and 192 are the storage targets of the history information. Further, since the setting change occurrence flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, even if supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, setting change occurs. The value stored in the flag is stored and retained.

  After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, the write processing to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the write processing, first, the pointer information 126 of the first history memory 191 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target, and the pointer information that is the write target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information in the first history memory 191. In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

  After that, update processing of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. Further, in the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When “1” is not set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: NO), the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 which is the storage target is selected. It means that only the history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are currently stored are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag, and when the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. If it is, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. Since the storage target flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag is stored. The value of is stored and held.

  After that, the history setting execution processing is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: YES), it is the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. After that, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

  When the process of step S2603 is executed or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 (step S2605). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not there is a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories in the history memories 191, 192 that are not to be stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that the game balls have been discharged is stored. Further, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so the first history memory 191 is moved from the game area PA to the game ball. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that the paper has been discharged is stored. It is to be noted that the game times have been executed, rather than determining whether or not the history information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored in a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “100”) or more of history information indicating is stored.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the storage target changing process, the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value different from the current value between the two values, so that the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 have different values. Change the side to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag "0". As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is set as a storage target. Then, various parameters are calculated by using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 that are newly stored, so that it is executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

  After that, the clear process is performed on the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that has been the storage target until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is " 0 ”is cleared. After that, the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

  Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the operation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is grasped as a storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second history memory 191 is stored. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. After that, using the history information stored in the storage target history memories 191 and 192 grasped in step S2702, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thus, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, fourteenth to forty-second parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. The result memory 131 is stored (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, various parameters are calculated by using one of the history memories 191 and 192 which are storage targets.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process of step S2703 has been executed, the display process is executed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, While the history memories 191 and 192 that have been storage targets are directly stored, the history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not storage targets. When a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the discharge of the game balls from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, the history information is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are stored as they are, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that have been stored until then are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only history information of the game performed at the newly set setting value. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as not to appropriately calculate various parameters, the history object to be stored is stored. Memories 191 and 192 remain unchanged. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that point.

  It should be noted that the history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which two memories, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192, are provided, and one memory can be used for the first history. The first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

  Alternatively, only one history memory 117 may be provided. In this case, when the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information before the specified timing may be deleted, and the history information after the setting timing may be stored and retained without being deleted. As a result, at a timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a history before the timing when the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It becomes possible to erase information. In addition, the history information corresponding to the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the history memory 117 at the timing when the new setting state is set, so that the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is set. It is possible to distinguish the history information before and the history information after the timing when is performed.

  Further, the timing of deleting the history information is not limited to the case where the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Instead, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed may be a predetermined number or more.

  Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the setting value is not changed before and after the new setting, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored and the history information When the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without erasing, and the setting value is changed before and after that, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above. May be changed and history information may be deleted.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of the signal to be input, which has been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, is the above-mentioned type. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 for causing the management CPU 112 to specify the type of the input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in this embodiment.

  A signal of the same type as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the 16th buffer 122p is instructed to output. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game game is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the eleventh signal, and the set value update signal is the fifteenth buffer. However, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the game round signal, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode. The signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as a signal, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is the 15th door-opening signal. It is input to the buffer 122o.

  The game time signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode input signal is input, the fifteenth buffer 122o is input with the door opening signal, and the sixteenth buffer 122p is input with an output instruction signal. Therefore, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the respective signals corresponding to the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p are input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, it is specified by the management-side CPU 112. The process for identifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

  First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, the output process of the identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output process, output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  After that, the information on the output count corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output count counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output number of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when making the management-side CPU 112 recognize the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the signal type. And the type identification signal is output the same number of times as. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the incoming ball portion corresponding to the type of the signal.

  In step S2803, if the value of the output counter for recognition is any of "10", "9", and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "6", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "4", the payout of the game ball is not executed even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, so the output number counter Set "0" to. When the value of the recognition output counter is any of "3" to "1", the corresponding ball input portion does not exist and is blank, so "0" is set to the output number counter.

  After that, the output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period in which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set on the output counter in step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  After that, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2808). When the value of the output counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S2808, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, the output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S2811). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and processing for recognizing the type of the signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction of 1 is executed. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2811: YES), the output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high-frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, the management processing executed by the management-side CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the process of step S2901 is executed again after the process for setting update recognition is executed in step S2902. The processing content of the setting update recognition processing is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S2904.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2905 or when the processing of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence relation setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence relation memory 116, the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is set in the reception number counter. Stores the specified value. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

  When a negative determination is made in step S2904 or when the processing of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2910). When the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the processes after step S2905 are performed. Run. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is finished (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912, and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 51 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence relationship between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. 51 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51 (d) indicates a period during which the output state of the signal in the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 51 (f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j, showing the period during which the output state of the signal in the high frequency support mode is at the HI level. FIG. 51 (g) shows the timing at which the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 51 (h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed. Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S2908) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a), 51 (d) and 51 (e), the first signal The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2901 of the management process (FIG. 50), and the identification state is entered as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51A from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51 (b). As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

  After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10 as shown in FIG. 51 (c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 51 (h), the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception number counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence relation setting process is executed, the correspondence relation information "1" is stored in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence relation memory 116 at this time. Information is stored.

  After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the timing t13 to timing t15, the timing t16 to timing t18, the timing t19 to timing t21, and the timing t22 to timing t24 are respectively changed as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 51 (g) at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23.

  After that, from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51 (c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j in the correspondence memory 116, which is the setting target this time. Information is stored.

  After that, at the timing of t28, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c), 51 (d), and 51 (e). Level is changed to HI level. As a result, the main CPU 63 starts outputting the identification end signal to the management CPU 112. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored in the history information, and the prize balls corresponding to the ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry parts having the same number of prize balls, the ball entry parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls in each of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is one, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. In such a situation, the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be different. This makes it possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information even if the history information is stored as in the present embodiment.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game time is started, information corresponding to whether or not in the opening and closing execution mode, Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the main CPU 63 determines that the signal path corresponds to these information. It is possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify the relationship information without receiving the correspondence information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information required to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j. Become. When causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing the information of each entrance result to the management IC 66. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 via the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the result of entering each of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

  The branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which an abnormal entry result is input only to the management IC 66. ..

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display device for displaying the management result of the game history is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of main controller 60 in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c, but in the present embodiment, the first notification display device 69a is provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven display segments using LEDs are arranged, but the display device is not limited to this, and a single multicolor emission type single display device is used. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed such that the display surface thereof faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10, so that the gaming machine. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the rear surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 through the facing wall portion 60b. It is possible to visually check the display surfaces of ~ 204.

  Alphabets such as “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” are displayed on the display surface of the first notification display device 201. On the other hand, on the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers are displayed in the range of “0” to “9”. The management results of the game history are notified by using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the management result of the game history that is the notification target in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters in the first embodiment). Parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are displayed, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 become notification targets. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the type of game history is performed.

  Specifically, as the type of game history management result, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, and the fourteenth to 42nd parameters in the first embodiment are described. Exists. On the first notification display device 201, a display corresponding to the type of parameter group that is the notification target is performed. Specifically, when any of the first to eighth parameters is the notification target, “A” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and one of the first to eighteenth parameters is displayed. When the notification target is the first notification display device 201, “E” is displayed, and when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is the notification target, the first notification display device is displayed. When “H” is displayed on 201 and any of the 31st parameters is the notification target, “L” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. When it is a target, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

  The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history that is the notification target among the arrangement order of the management results of the game history in the parameter group that is the notification target. Explaining the parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is the notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is When it is the notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the third parameter is the notification target, “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the fourth parameter is the notification target, and the second notification is displayed when the fifth parameter is the notification target. When "5" is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is the notification target, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is the notification target. If there is a second notification display device 202 "7" is displayed Te, when the eighth parameter is a notification target "8" is displayed in the second notification for the display device 202. Further, the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters will be described as an example. When the 21st parameter is the notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the 22nd parameter is displayed. When the parameter is the notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 23rd parameter is the notification target, the “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. "3" is displayed, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 24th parameter is the notification target, and "2" is displayed when the 25th parameter is the notification target. "5" is displayed on the notification display device 202, and "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is the notification target.

  For details of the display contents of the third annunciation display device 203 and the fourth annunciator display device 204, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be informed by 100, the numeral corresponding to the tens digit is the third annunciator. The number is displayed on the display device 203, and the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  In the 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204, the said 1st-8th parameters, the said 11th-18th parameters, the said 21st-26th parameters, the said 31st parameters, and the said 41st-42nd. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display object in the last order, is displayed, the first parameter that is the display object in the first order is displayed. The calculation result of is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 are subject to notification in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, not only the notification of the management result of the game history but also the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed as in the first embodiment. In, the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, whereas in the horizontally arranged first to fourth notification display devices 204, they are present at the right end. A value corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. That is, when “setting 1” is selected in the changeable state, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 2” is selected in the changeable state “2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 3” is selected in the changeable state, “3” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and can be changed. When "setting 4" is selected in the state, "4" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "setting 5" is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification is displayed. "5" is displayed on the display device 204, and when "setting 6" is selected in the changeable state, "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62.

  As described above, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207 and a fourth display IC 208.

  The first display IC 205 is provided so as to correspond to the first notification display device 201, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL31, and is electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 through the signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201, that is, each display is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the display segment. The first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed by the first notification display device. It is continuously displayed on 201. Then, the display data is changed by the MPU 62, so that the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in a situation after the supply of the operating power to the first display IC 205 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all “0” data. Indicates that the first notification display device 201 is in the non-display state, that is, in the extinguished state.

  However, the configuration is not limited to this, and even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the first display IC 205, the first display IC 205 displays The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started on the first notification display device 201.

  The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL33, and is electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through the signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202, that is, each display according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the display segment. The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed on the second notification display device. It is continuously displayed on 202. Then, the display data is changed by the MPU 62, so that the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of the operating power to the second display IC 206 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all “0” data. Indicates that the second notification display device 202 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the second display IC 206 displays even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the second display IC 206. The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started by the second notification display device 202.

  The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL35, and is electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through the signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203, that is, each display, according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the display segment. The third display IC 207 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed by the third notification display device. The display is continued on 203. When the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation after the supply of the operating power to the third display IC 207 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data becomes all “0” data. Indicates that the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the third display IC 207 displays even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the third display IC 207. The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started on the third notification display device 203.

  The fourth display IC 208 is provided so as to correspond to the fourth notification display device 204, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL37, and is electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 through the signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204, that is, each display is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the display segment. The fourth display IC 208 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed by the fourth notification display device. The display is continued at 204. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in a situation after the supply of the operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data becomes all “0” data. Indicates that the fourth notification display device 204 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the fourth display IC 208 displays even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the fourth display IC 208. The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started by the fourth notification display device 204.

  The output of the display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, and the output setting of the display data is performed by each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. That is, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management CPU 112 executes the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the period in which the output setting of the display data is performed is adjusted so that the output setting of the display data is not performed at the same time in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. Specifically, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started. In the changeable state, the output setting of the display data by the main CPU 63 is performed. On the other hand, the output setting of the display data by the management CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in the state where the set value is not changeable, the output data of the display data is set by the management CPU 112, whereas the output data of the display data is not set by the main CPU 63.

  If the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 are performed at the time of synchronization, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 is prioritized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display side output setting by the management-side CPU 112 may be prioritized.

  Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the value of the update timing counter of the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that it is time to update the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. After that, by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0”, whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Is determined (step S3002).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In this case, the 42nd parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, the display data setting process corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and the display data setting process corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is “0” and the first parameter is the display target, the display data for displaying “A” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed on the first display IC 205. In addition to the output, the display data for displaying “1” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. Further, for example, if the value of the display target counter is “24” and the 42nd parameter is the display target, the display data for displaying “O” on the first notification display device 201 is first displayed. The output data to the IC 205 and the display data for displaying “2” on the second notification display device 202 are output to the second display IC 206.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the operation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the tens digit and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the result obtained by multiplying the read parameter by 100 are displayed. It is read from the management-side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, the display control of the third notification display device 203 is performed so that the number corresponding to the tens place of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth number is displayed so that the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed. The display of the notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3011). For example, when the result multiplied by 100 is “53”, the display data for displaying “5” on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207 and the fourth notification display device 204 is displayed. Display data for displaying “3” is output to the fourth display IC 208.

  After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

  By executing the display process as described above, the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to fourth notification display device 201 is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~ 204.

  The display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. To be done. In this case, like the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is being supplied, and the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. Display control. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not in the off state (that is, the non-display state), and the lighting state corresponding to any display ( That is, the display state).

  Next, the setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the extinguishing process of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is executed (step S3101). Specifically, the display data that is all “0” is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, all the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off. Immediately after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all in the off state and the first to fourth notification display device 201. ˜204 are non-display states. Therefore, step S3101 is a process of maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is caused by some influence. If it is in the display state, it is a process of setting it in the non-display state.

  After that, "1" is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

  Then, the display start processing of the set value in the fourth display annunciation device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “Setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  After that, on condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, the display update process of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the display update process of the set value, the display data for displaying the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After executing the process of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processes of step S3105 and thereafter are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), display start processing of the management result in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

  In the display start process, a display start command of the management result is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. Upon receiving the management result display start command, the management-side CPU 112 executes processing for displaying the first parameter of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display process (FIG. 55). Thereby, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, the display modes of the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the game history management result and for updating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 57 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the game history management result is displayed, and FIG. 57 (b) is a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 1st-4th notification display apparatuses 201-204 in case the setting state of 10 is changed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 57 (a). That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. This is the same regardless of which of the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the fourteenth to the forty-second parameter is to be notified. .. Thereby, the manager of the game hall visually confirms that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state. It is possible to understand that the management result of the game history is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments are turned off in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 as shown in FIG. 57 (b). That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in the non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As described above, by displaying any one of “1” to “6” on the fourth notification display device 204 and turning off each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to understand that the display corresponding to the set value is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and to clearly understand the current set value. It becomes possible.

  Next, the manner in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (h). FIG. 58A shows a changeable state period in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58B shows a setting display update on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 58C shows the timing, FIG. 58C shows a period in which the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58D is the first to fourth notification display device. The update timing of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history in 201-204 is shown, FIG.58 (e) shows the period when the 1st notification display apparatus 201 is in a display state, and FIG.58 (f) shows it. 2 shows the period during which the notification display device 202 is in the display state, FIG. 58 (g) shows the period during which the third notification display device 203 is in the display state, and FIG. 58 (h) shows the fourth notification. For when the display device 204 for display is in the display state It is shown.

  By changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 58 (a) by starting to supply the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key insertion section 68a being turned on. Can be changed. At the timing of t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58B, and the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state as shown in FIG. 58H, and the display state is continued. In this case, since "setting 1" has been selected, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, that is, all the display segments are turned off. Maintained.

  After that, the operation of changing the set value is performed by operating the update button 68b at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. Is the update timing of the set value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), in the fourth notification display device 204, the display content is switched to the number corresponding to the changed setting value at each timing, but the display content is switched. The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including the respective timings at which On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the display devices 201 to 203 for the first to third notifications are in the non-display state, that is, for all the display, at each of the update timings of these set value displays. The segment remains off.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off at the timing of t6, and the changeable state is ended as shown in FIG. 58 (a). In this case, at the timing of t6, the display period of the game history management result is started as shown in FIG. 58 (c). Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state, and the fourth notification display is displayed. Although the display content of the device 204 is changed, the display state is maintained.

  After that, at each of the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, and the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 58D, the display timing of the management result of the game history is updated. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58 (e) to 58 (h), the display contents corresponding to the updated management result of the game history at each of the timings in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Although it is switched, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state including the timings at which the display contents are switched.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the changeable state, the corresponding display is displayed. This is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, it becomes possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing the corresponding display in the changeable state. ..

  Corresponding to the period in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the setting value changeable state on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period during which it is displayed. Accordingly, by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, any display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify whether or not there is.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have different display modes from the display mode when the game history management result is displayed. Display controlled. Accordingly, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to identify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, a wide variety of displays can be performed as the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of the plurality of display devices 201 to 204 for notification, the display mode is large depending on whether the management result of the game history is displayed or the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 that are not hidden when displaying the management result of the game history are hidden. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value are performed only by confirming whether the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly specify which one of them is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display content is the fourth notification display device 204 when displaying the management result of the game history. The display contents can be displayed in. By thus allowing the display contents on the fourth annunciation display device 204 to be duplicated, the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, respectively. It is possible not to restrict the display contents of. Even if the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 are duplicated as described above, if the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to third notification display devices are displayed. Since 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are clearly different between when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. It becomes possible.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state even when the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed. .. As a result, it is possible to specify the game history management result regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed in the situation where the game history management result is displayed. Further, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the game history management result is displayed and the set value can be changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is displayed.

  In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the lateral direction, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is displayed using only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end. Done. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is displayed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, a display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed by using the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. This makes it easier to understand the management result of the game history. In this case, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state in the set value changeable state. As a result, the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the set value, which corresponds to the changeable state of the set value. It becomes easy to understand that the display is being performed.

  Further, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of the management result of the game history, but also the game The third notification display device 203, which displays the content of the history management result, is also in the non-display state. This makes it easy to understand that the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

  Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In the configuration, the display data is stored and held by the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. As a result, even when the execution of the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is stopped due to the occurrence of the radio wave detection abnormality or the vibration detection abnormality (in the case of making a positive determination in step S306), It is possible to maintain the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, in the changeable state in which it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the targets to be in the non-display state (all extinguished state) are: The display devices 201 to 203 are not limited to the third display devices 201 to 203, and may be the first and second display devices 201 and 202. In this case, a predetermined display (for example, display of "5") different from the content of the current set value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. May be displayed, and a predetermined display (for example, display of "5") different from the content of the current set value may be displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and the third notification may be displayed. The display device 203 may display a number corresponding to the current set value. Further, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all extinguished state), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. Alternatively, the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all lights off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all extinguished state), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all extinguished state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state. Is displayed It may be configured.

  Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the non-display state (all off state), and the second notification Only the display device 202 may be in a non-display state (all off state), only the third notification display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all off state), and the fourth notification display device. Only 204 may be in a non-display state (all extinguished state).

  Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 is displayed. The third notification display device 203 alone may be in the display state.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the set value changeable state are different from the eleventh embodiment. The configuration different from that of the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  59A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59B is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed in a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202 a to 202 g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 is a so-called 7-segment display.

  FIG. 60 shows a case where the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a first notification display device 201 and a second notification display device 202 in FIG.

  The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the game history management result are the same as in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, any one of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and “1” to “8” on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed.

  In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is "A", "E", "H", "L" in the first notification display device 201. At least one type of display of “O” is a light emission target. That is, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not the light emission targets are displayed regardless of which of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201. It doesn't exist.

  Similarly, with respect to the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 is "1" to "8" in the second notification display device 202. In at least one type of display, the light emission target is displayed. In other words, there is no display segment 202a to 202g that is not the target of light emission regardless of which of "1" to "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in the light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed on the first notification display device 201. Furthermore, when displaying the management result of the game history on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state. It does not exist when displaying results. Thereby, in the state where the set value can be changed, the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in the light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history are used, and the display which is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed. The mode can be displayed on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be displayed on the first notification display device 201 while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It will be possible.

  In the state in which the set value can be changed, the third display segment 202c in the second notification display device 202 is in the light emitting state. As described above, the third display segment 202c can be in a light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed on the second notification display device 202. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g, only the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state, and the display content of the second notification display device 202 is present when the game history management result is displayed. I haven't. Thereby, in the changeable state of the set value, while using the display segment 202c which can be in the light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history, a display mode which is not displayed when displaying the management result of the game history is displayed. It is possible to display it on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, it is possible to cause the second notification display device 202 to perform a display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It will be possible.

  Next, the setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the start processing of displaying the set values on the first to second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, 201g are in the off state. The following display data is output to the first display IC 205. Further, regarding the second notification display device 202, display data is output to the second display IC 206 in which the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in the off state. As a result, the display for informing that the pachinko machine 10 is in the changeable state in which the setting state can be changed is started on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

  Then, the extinguishing process of the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, the display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state.

  After that, "1" is set in the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

  Then, the display start processing of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “Setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  After that, on condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3208, or when the process of step S3209 is executed, the display update process of the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the display update process of the set value, the display data for displaying the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After executing the process of step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processes of step S3206 and subsequent steps are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), display start processing of the management result in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

  In the display start process, a display start command of the management result is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. Upon receiving the management result display start command, the management-side CPU 112 executes processing for displaying the first parameter of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display process (FIG. 55). Thereby, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  The setting value can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that can be in the light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed to the light emitting state. A display corresponding to the status is made. As a result, in diversifying the display of the game history management result, it is possible to prevent the content of the display corresponding to the game history management result from being restricted as much as possible. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to become the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. The combination of 202g is a combination that does not exist when the game history management result is displayed. Thereby, by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display of the game history management result It is possible to grasp which of the displays corresponding to the changeable state of the set value and the set value is displayed.

  For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there is a display segment 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g that does not become a light emitting state even if the game history management result is displayed in all patterns. I haven't. This makes it possible to limit the display contents of the game history management result as much as possible in order to diversify the display corresponding to the game history management result.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the third notification display device 203, which is not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history, is in the non-display state. Thereby, not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state is confirmed, and thus the game history It is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Note that it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, and is limited to the configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state is set. Instead, a plurality of types may be set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents may be predetermined, and the display contents to be displayed may be changed in accordance with the display order each time the changeable state is newly executed. Thus, even when there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the set value, those display contents are in the light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed. .About.201g, 202a to 202g are displayed, and the display contents are not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed.

  In addition, in one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of displaying corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices A configuration may be adopted in which blinking display is performed in 201 and 202, and display that keeps lighting is performed in the other. In this case, the game hall manager can specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state, depending on whether the display is blinking or lit. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g which are in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be the combination used when displaying the management result of the game history, and the management of the game history. It may be a combination that is not used when displaying the result. Further, the lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be the same in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely deviated. Alternatively, only a part of them may overlap.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which is different from the eleventh embodiment. There is. The configuration different from that of the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65.

  The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on an abnormal state to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, the first unit area 211a, the second unit area 211b, the third unit area 211c, and the fourth unit area 211d are provided. It is possible to store information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 one by one in each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d. That is, in the abnormality display area 211, a maximum of four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored and held.

  Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 63 specifies all the information on the abnormal state that occurs in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when an abnormality related to the payout of gaming balls (for example, the lower plate 56a is full, the ball in the tank 75 is absent, a payout abnormality by the payout device 76), a command corresponding to the generated abnormality is issued to the payout CPU 92. From the main CPU 63. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor, an abnormal signal corresponding thereto is transmitted to the main CPU 63 to cause an abnormal condition. When the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, an abnormal signal corresponding to the detected vibration is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, the occurrence of disconnection abnormality of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified based on the fact that normal signals are not transmitted from the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a.

  The types of abnormal states specified by the main CPU 63 are larger than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur at the same time, it is expected that new abnormal information will occur although the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. On the other hand, for the abnormal state information, the storage priority is set in the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and in the situation where the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211, When an abnormal state occurs in, abnormal state information with a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. As a result, it becomes possible to give priority to the notification of the abnormal state having a high storage priority.

  Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of abnormal display targets include full filling of the lower plate 56a, no ball in the tank 75, abnormal dispensing by the dispensing device 76, abnormal radio wave detection, abnormal vibration detection, and disconnection abnormalities in each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display targets is larger than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3301, whether or not the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time is already stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. Is determined (step S3302). If already stored, the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to prevent the same type of abnormal state information from being redundantly stored in the abnormal display area 211.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in the abnormality display area 211 in which the information on the abnormal state is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d.

  When the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is specified among the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. The memory priority is predetermined in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the lower tray 56a is full → the ball in the tank 75 is absent → the vibration detection abnormality → the dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76 → the entrance detection sensor 42a. The storage priority increases in the order of disconnection abnormality of 49a to radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, one of the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target generated this time has a higher storage priority. It is compared and judged.

  If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), the abnormality display area 211 does not store information about the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is larger than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on an abnormal state having a high storage priority is displayed. It is possible to leave it in the abnormality display area 211.

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the setting process of the abnormality display area 211 that is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the unit areas 211a to 211d specified as storing the information of the abnormal state having the lowest storage priority occur this time. The information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target is overwritten.

  On the other hand, when the value of the abnormality target counter of the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), the value of the abnormality target counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307), and then the abnormality display area 211 is set. Is executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in which the information on the abnormal state is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that occurred this time in the selected area. Stores the information of.

  In step S3306, if only one piece of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the above, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n" in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b.

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormal display target release event has occurred (step S3308). For example, whether or not a command indicating that the lower tray 56a is full, that the tank 75 is out of ball, or that the dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76 has been released is received from the dispensing side CPU 92. judge. In addition, whether or not the abnormality release operation for the occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality has been performed, whether the abnormality release operation for the occurrence of vibration detection abnormality has been performed, or whether the abnormality release operation for the occurrence of disconnection abnormality has been performed. judge.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3308, an erasing process of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is specified whether or not the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that is the current cancellation target is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. If it is stored, the stored area is cleared to "0" to erase the information on the abnormal state. In this case, if only one piece of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasing, the information of the abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored. When there are a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area having the smallest value of "n" in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b. Further, the value of the abnormality target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3310).

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the abnormality display has occurred (step S3311). The abnormal display start operation is performed by pressing the update button 68b with the gaming machine main body 12 opened to the front with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by operating.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether one or more pieces of abnormal state information are stored in the abnormal display area 211 (step S3312). If the information on the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the abnormal display from being started even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, "1" is set to the abnormality display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). The abnormal display flag stops the display corresponding to the management result of the game history, and displays the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is to be carried out. Even if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag is already set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

  After that, the management result display stop setting process is executed (step S3314). In the cancellation setting process, a display cancellation command is transmitted to the management-side CPU 112 to temporarily cancel the update of the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Upon receiving the display stop command, the management-side CPU 112 stops the display process (FIG. 55). However, the management-side CPU 112 does not set the display data to be the data of all “0” in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 even if the display stop command is received. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the game history management result at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation of ending the abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). The operation of ending the abnormality display is performed by pressing the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by operating. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). Even if the operation of ending the abnormal display is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

  After that, the cancellation release process of displaying the management result is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation canceling process, the cancellation cancellation command is transmitted to the management-side CPU 112 so that the update of the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is canceled. To release. The management CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display process (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancellation cancel command. However, the management-side CPU 112 does not set the display data, which is the data of all “0”, in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 even if the cancel release command is received. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the management side CPU 112 continues to store the history information and calculate various parameters even when the update of the display of the management result of the game history is stopped, and the result of the operation of various parameters is calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the state in which the update of the display of the management result of the game history is canceled is canceled, the display of the latest management result of the game history is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be restarted.

  In the abnormality setting process, if "1" is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), the abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the abnormality display processing.

  First, the extinguishing process of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, the display data that is all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all of the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are hidden.

  After that, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the time to update the display content of the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. If the value of the update timing counter is already "0", that state is maintained. After that, by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter is “0”, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ( Step S3403).

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3403, the display target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is updated (step S3404). In this update process, if the current abnormal display process has been performed for the first time since the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65 has been set to "1" this time, the display target counter is set to "0". The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, and specifically, the value of "0" of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The display target counter “1” value corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the display target counter “2” value corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and the display target counter “3”. The value of “” corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update processing, the value of the display target counter is incremented by 1 if this is not the first processing time of the abnormality display processing after the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1".

  After that, it is determined whether or not the abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as described above, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of abnormal state information is stored. In this case, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area having the smallest “n” value in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, when the abnormal state information is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, the abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. Further, when the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “3”, there is no corresponding area in the first place, and therefore the information on the abnormal state is treated as not stored. ..

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all of the abnormal states targeted for the abnormal display are canceled in the situation where the abnormal display is being performed. In this case, even if the abnormal display process is executed, the abnormal display area 211 does not store the abnormal state information. In such a situation, a display indicating that the information on the abnormal state is not stored is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the process of step S3406 is executed, the display data of the display target corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 is read. Then, the display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are set for each type of abnormal state information. It's different. There is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data differs from the display data corresponding to abnormal state information. Therefore, when the abnormal state information does not exist, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are different from those when the abnormal state information exists.

  On the other hand, the display content of the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content of the display corresponding to the absence of the information of the abnormal state are The display contents when displaying the management result of the game history on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display contents of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 overlap. On the other hand, when displaying the management result of the game history, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state and the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and when the abnormal display is performed, the first and second notification display devices Since 201 and 202 are in the non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, even if the display contents are duplicated as described above, any situation can be dealt with. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to know whether the display is displayed.

  After that, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled according to the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3409). In this case, regardless of whether the display corresponding to the abnormal state information is performed or the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state information is performed, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification None of the display devices 204 is in the non-display state (that is, is not in the all-off state), and is in some display state.

  After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done. As a result, it becomes possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the abnormal state has not occurred in the pachinko machine 10, when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used, A display corresponding to that no abnormal condition has occurred is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly specify whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an abnormal state by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  The display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed on the period in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period for which it is opened. Accordingly, by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, any display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify whether or not there is.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have different display modes from the display mode when the game history management result is displayed. Display controlled. Accordingly, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to identify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, a wide variety of displays can be performed as the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of the plurality of display devices 201 to 204 for notification, the display mode is large depending on whether the management result of the game history is displayed or the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that are not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history are in the non-display state. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed only by confirming whether or not the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly specify which one of them is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, and the display content is the third when the game history management result is displayed. , Display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. By thus allowing the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 to overlap with each other, the display corresponding to the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It is possible not to give a restriction to each display content when it is performed. Further, even if the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 may overlap as described above, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first, first Since the second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, when an abnormal display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormal display area 211 does not store the abnormal state information, the abnormal state information is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. May be configured to be displayed corresponding to the fact that is not stored.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start criterion. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or larger than the management start reference value, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the number becomes equal to or larger than the number corresponding to the value. Storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, for example, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are cared for in each ball-in portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the management start reference value or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball during the above-described operation check from being stored as history information.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set to the start time management counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start-time management counter indicates which of the seven ball-in detection sensors 42a to 48a is in a state in which the detection state of the game ball is specified in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start time management counter is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the start time management counter is "7" and it corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. If the value of the start time management counter is "6" and it corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the start time management is performed. When the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the start-time management counter is When it is "4" and corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the start time management counter is "3" and the first If the working port detection sensor 46a is supported, the fifth output flag is set. It is determined whether or not "1" is set, and if the value of the start time management counter is "2" and it corresponds to the second working opening detection sensor 47a, "1" is set in the sixth output flag. If the value of the start management counter is "1" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, it is determined whether the seventh output flag is set to "1". .. As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the entry detection process (FIG. 15).

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start time management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). After that, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag of the main RAM 65.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharged number counter is equal to or larger than the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to “300”, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number may be smaller than “300” or may be larger than “300”. ..

  When a negative determination is made in step S3503 or when a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start-time management counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start time management counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the output process for management is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or larger than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). After that, the management process is executed (step S3510). Also, when the management start flag is set to "1" and a positive determination is made in step S3501, the management process is executed (step S3510). The processing content of the management process is the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the number of game balls is equal to or larger than the start reference value, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or larger than the management start reference value. In this case, the storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, for example, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are cared for in each ball-in portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the management start reference value or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball during the above-described operation check from being stored as history information.

  Here, for history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started is equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value. In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the memory 117, the management result of the game history during that period cannot be calculated. Therefore, in such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the situation. For example, all the display segments in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be in a light emitting state. Since the display content is not displayed either in the case of displaying the management result of the game history or in the case of displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not the history information is not stored as described above.

  Note that the setting mode of the information of the management start flag of the main RAM 65 differs depending on whether or not the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. It may be configured to. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in the other mode. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processing as steps S101 to S109 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main processing (see FIG. The same processing as steps S110 to S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this another embodiment, when a positive determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3610), and after the processing of step S3620 is executed, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is executed. Is set to "1" (step S3621). According to the configuration, when the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until is greater than or equal to the management start reference value, and when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, The history information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of discharged game balls after the supply of the operating power is started. As a result, in a situation in which there is a high possibility that the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to occur, it becomes possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Instead of the non-history configuration, an area for storing history information may be provided separately from the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls exceeds a management start reference value. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the situation.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a condition for the occurrence of the non-existence situation, a configuration may be added in which the condition that the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in the situation where the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 is added. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start criterion. The history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether the value is greater than or equal to the value.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or instead of the configuration that does not exist, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 when an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality is released. This makes it possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that occurred in an abnormal state.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or instead of the non-existing configuration, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 when the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurred in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution subject of the process for managing the game history is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  Although the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66 in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. Instead of the management IC 66 being provided, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes processing for managing the game history. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes various controls by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, the control relating to the management of the game history is the non-specific control, and the control other than the non-specific control is the specific control including the control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player.

  Regarding the specific control in detail, all the control by the main process (FIG. 9) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started is included in the specific control. In this embodiment, the recognition process (step S111), the data output process (step S112), and the set value update signal output process (step S119) of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are performed. Not executed Further, even in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is executed periodically so as to interrupt the processing of steps S113 to S116 in the main processing (FIG. 9). All of the processes other than the management process described later are included in the specific control. Part of the management process is also included in the specific control.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 64. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is differentiated between the specific control and the non-specific control, as shown in FIG. The addresses of the areas in which the data and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, the programs for specific control are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of addresses X (1) to X (k + 2). Further, addresses X (k + 3) to X (k + 5) consecutive to the addresses X (1) to X (k + 2) are addresses of an unused area in which no data is stored, and the address X ( Data for specific control is collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of k + 6) to X (m + 2). Further, addresses X (m + 3) to X (m + 5) consecutive to the addresses X (k + 6) to X (m + 2) are addresses of an unused area in which no data is stored, and the address X ( Programs for non-specific control are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of m + 6) to X (n + 2). Further, the addresses X (n + 3) to X (n + 5), which are consecutive to the addresses X (m + 6) to X (n + 2), are addresses of unused areas in which no data is stored, and the address X ( Data for non-specific control are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address in the range of (n + 6) to X (p + 2). The relationship between the program and data and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 64 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

  As described above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, regardless of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control, Since the addresses are stored in different address areas, for example, when checking only the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the address where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored Only the area of the range needs to be checked. For example, when checking only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, the address where the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored You only need to check the area within the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform the work for checking the program and the data by distinguishing between the specific control and the non-specific control. Further, along with this, it becomes possible to efficiently perform the work when the program and the data are distinguished and corrected by the specific control and the non-specific control.

  No data is stored between the address range of the area where the specific control program and the data for the specific control are stored and the address range of the area where the non-specific control program and the data for the non-specific control are stored. By setting the address range of the unused area which is not set, the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control can be easily grasped at the time of checking work.

  In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in areas with different range of addresses, regardless of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it becomes possible to efficiently perform the work for checking the program and the data separately. In addition, since the address range of the unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored, It becomes easy to understand the boundary between the address range and the address range of the data when checking.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 65. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is classified into specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 68, the main RAM 65 also has a work area 221 for specific control and a specific control. The address range of the stack area 222 for non-specific control and the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) is set as the work area 221 for specific control. Further, the addresses Y (r + 3) to Y (r + 5) that are continuous with the addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) are the addresses of the unused areas, and subsequently, the addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2). The area of each consecutive address within the range of () is set as a stack area 222 for specific control. Further, the addresses Y (s + 3) to Y (s + 5) that are continuous with the addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, the addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2). The area of each successive address within the range of () is set as the work area 223 for non-specific control. Addresses Y (t + 3) to Y (t + 5), which are continuous with addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2), are addresses of unused areas, and are followed by addresses Y (t + 6) to Y (u + 2). The area of each successive address within the range of () is set as a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

  When the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are set separately as described above, the main CPU 63 executes the specific control and the non-specific control is executed. Thus, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when various calculations are executed. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the other to erase the necessary information in the main RAM 65. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 221, 223 and reading information from each work area 221, 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load instruction.

  Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set separately, the main CPU 63 mainly performs the specific control and the non-specific control. Different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when saving the information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and when storing the information of the return address on the program. As a result, in the case where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is being executed, the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved and the information of the return address on the program is stored. It is possible to make it difficult for an event such as the deletion of the stored information to occur. Incidentally, when writing information to the stack areas 222 and 224, a push command is issued by the main CPU 63, and when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224, a pop instruction is issued by the main CPU 63. Further, when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224, the order of writing to the stack areas 222 and 224 is to be read first after the later information.

  Here, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and Information can be read from the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is impossible to write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

  When the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. At the same time, it is possible to read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. It is impossible to write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

  Next, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in a situation where the processes of steps S113 to S116 are executed in the main process (FIG. 9). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

  In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processing as steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment is executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data. In step S3719 of the timer interrupt processing, management processing is executed. When the management process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the management process. The processes of steps S3801 to S3805 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S3801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving such information in the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the information in the flag register in the state before the change of the call of the subroutine or the start of the subroutine is saved. It is possible to save it in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

  After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S3803). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 by the pop command as “POP PSW” is used as the main CPU 63. The flag register is reset (step S3804). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S3805). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the management execution process. The processes of steps S3901 to S3915 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as "LDSP, Y (u + 2)", a load instruction sets Y (u + 2) as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which information of an address for specifying the storage area in the stack areas 222 and 224 to which information is to be written by the push command is specified by the main CPU 63. Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the information of the address of the storage area that is the next write target, and each time a pop instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated in the previous write order. The information of the address of the storage area is updated. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the information to be stored is added every time. In addition, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, the information of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. As described above, the information is stored from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address also in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  By the way, regarding both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, when the push command is additionally executed even though the information is set in all the storage areas, All areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" as an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding as it is even though an abnormality occurs in the storage process.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3902). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the load instruction saves the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3903). Also, "LD
(_DEBUF), DE ”, the load instruction saves the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 to the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3904). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3905). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the load instruction saves the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3906). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the load instruction saves the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3907).

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, there are various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, each information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which is a partial register among these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register each have an information amount of 2 bytes.

  The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S3908) corresponding to the non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S3908), the information in these registers used in the specific control is controlled by non-specific control. It is possible to evacuate before the start of. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control is restored to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the states of these registers are restored. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Further, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check process corresponding to the non-specific control is used. Register information is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control by selectively saving information in the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the information in the register as described above while securing a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used in the check processing. Of course, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers of the main CPU 63 other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are compatible with non-specific control. The information set before the processing to be performed is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the processing corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

  Further, the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be suppressed to a small extent by saving the register information not in the non-specific control stack area 224 but in the non-specific control work area 223. It will be possible. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the information writing order is read earlier from the later information, as described above. Therefore, the information reading order is temporarily shifted due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

  After executing the processes of steps S3902 to S3907, the check process is executed (step S3908). When executing the check process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program is returned to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. Details of the check process will be described later.

  After executing the check process, Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address at the time of returning to the specific control to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LDSP, Y (r + α)” (step S3909). ). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  The amount of information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control is always constant immediately before the subroutine of the management execution processing is executed in step S3803 of the management processing (FIG. 70). The information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, as the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control, for example, the information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) is completed, and the management process ( Information on the return address of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) after the end of FIG. 70) can be given. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y (r + α). Therefore, when the check process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, Y (r + α), which is the certain information, is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. As a result, the information of the stack pointer can be restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 before starting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 65.

  After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S3910). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3911). In addition, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S3912). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the load instruction overwrites the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control in the HL register of the main CPU 63 (step S3913). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3914). Further, as "LDIY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before.

  Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted. . As a result, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222.

  Further, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the flag register and the various registers of the main CPU 63 has the process corresponding to the non-specific control after returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. This information is not used when restarted. In other words, the information necessary for a plurality of processing times of the process corresponding to the non-specific control executed with the process corresponding to the specific control sandwiched therebetween is the work area 223 for the non-specific control or the stack area for the non-specific control. 224, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. Does not cause any problems.

  Next, the check processing executed by calling the program of the subroutine in step S3908 will be described. In the check process, a process for collecting game history information, a process for deriving a game history management result, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. That is, the processing for collecting information on the game history, the processing for deriving the management result of the game history, and the processing for notifying the management result are executed as processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Prior to the description of the check processing, the contents of various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used for managing the game history will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control used for managing the game history.

  The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. In each of these areas 231-233, general prize winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special electricity prize winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and Out counters 231e, 232e, 233e are provided. The general prize counters 231a, 232a, 233a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general prize hole 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric prize winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. Out counters 231e, 232e, 233e are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

  Each of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 is a target ball-in portion 24a in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode. It is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the balls 31 to 34. Each of the counters 232a to 232e in the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232 enters the target ball-in portion 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the opening / closing execution mode. It is used to count the number of game balls played. Each of the counters 233a to 233e of the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode is a target ball entry portion 24a, 31 to 34 in a high frequency support mode in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It is used to count the number of game balls that enter the.

  In addition, the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is out of the measurement target because the game balls enter the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is because the number of entered balls in the case of being excluded is excluded from the measurement target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be a measurement target similarly to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

  The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 234 in addition to the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on the management result of the game history calculated by using the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. . The information on the management result of the game history stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the information on the management result of the game history is newly calculated and the newly calculated information is overwritten.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the check processing executed by calling the program of the subroutine in step S3908. The processes of steps S4001 to S4008 in the check process, including the process of the subroutine, are executed in the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. Further, when executing the processing of the subroutine, the information of the return address after the execution of the processing of the subroutine is written in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be stored in the next order. When the processing of the subroutine is completed, the information of the return address is read from the storage area corresponding to the value of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63, which corresponds to the value of the previous order, and the information of the return address is corresponded. While returning to the program, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area from which the information of the return address is read.

  In the check process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4001: YES), a normal ball entry management process (step S4004), a ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode (step S4005), and a high frequency. The result calculation process (step S4007) and the display process (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing any of the entry management process (step S4006) in the support mode. Since the game area PA is formed by the space defined by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. Further, when the game balls enter the ball entrance portions 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the game hall manager may perform maintenance or trouble elimination. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and the game balls enter due to maintenance or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a normal game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage such a game ball entry. Therefore, in the check processing, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processing of steps S4004 to S4006 is executed.

  When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither in the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode (step S4001 to step S4003: NO), normal ball entry management processing is executed (step S4004). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), the entrance management process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4005). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the normal entrance management processing in step S4004.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is switched from LOW level to HI level. When it is confirmed that it has been changed, when it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. Is confirmed to have switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), that is, the third winning opening. If it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 44a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the normal input for normal use is performed. The value of the counter 231a is incremented by 1 (step S4102, step S4104, step S4106).

  In the case of the entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104 and S4106, and the winning in the high frequency support mode is performed. In the case of ball management processing, the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the processing corresponding to steps S4102, S4104 and S4106. Further, in the ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are monitored, and When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by any of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a, a process for paying out the number of gaming balls corresponding to the general winning opening 31 To execute.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), that is, it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the value of the normal-use special electric prize winning counter 231b is incremented by 1 (step S4108).

  If it is a ball entry management process in the high frequency support mode, the value of the special electric prize winning counter 232b for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4108 if the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode. As the process corresponding to step S4108, 1 is added to the value of the special electric prize winning counter 233b for the high frequency support mode. Further, the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the incoming ball detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and one electric power detection sensor 45a detects one electric power. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a process for causing the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 to be paid out is executed, and a process for specifying the timing for ending the round game is executed.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, the signal received from the first working opening detection sensor 46a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the value has been changed, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

  In the case of the entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4110, and the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode may be performed. For example, as the process corresponding to step S4110, the value of the first operation counter 233c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1. The detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is also monitored in the ball entry detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the first working opening detection sensor is detected. When it is determined that one game ball is detected at 46a, a process for causing the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation port 33 to be paid out is executed, and the pending information for special figures is acquired. Execute the process to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that the one game ball is detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, the signal received from the second working opening detection sensor 47a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If it is confirmed that the value has been changed, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

  In addition, if it is the entrance management process in the open / close execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4112, and it may be the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode. For example, as the process corresponding to step S4112, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1. Further, the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is also monitored in the entrance detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the second working opening detection sensor is detected. When it is determined that one game ball is detected at 47a, a process for causing the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34 to be paid out is executed, and the pending information for special figures is acquired. Execute the process to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, the signal received from the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

  In the case of the entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 232e for the opening / closing execution mode as the process corresponding to step S4114, and in the case of the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode, the step is performed. As the process corresponding to S4114, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 233e for the high frequency support mode. Further, in the entrance detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is not monitored.

  By performing the processing of step S4004 to step S4006 as described above, the number of game balls to enter the general winning opening 31 is measured by using the general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, and the special prize winning device 32 The number of game balls entering the game ball is measured using the special electric prize winning counters 231b, 232b and 233b, and the number of game ball entering the first working port 33 is measured using the first working counters 231c, 232c and 233c. Is measured by using the second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured by the out counter 231e, It is measured using 232e and 233e. As a result, the main CPU 63 can grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34. Further, since the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are separately provided, it is possible that the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are not included. It is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the entry history into each entry portion 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the open / close execution mode situation and the high-frequency support mode situation.

  Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 73), if an affirmative judgment is made in step S4001, the process of step S4004 is executed, the process of step S4005 is executed, or the process of step S4006 is executed, A result calculation process is executed in step S4007, and a display process is executed in step S4008.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process of step S4007.

  First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is a situation in which the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history should be executed. In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game discharged from the game area PA. Until the total number of balls exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is not executed without collecting the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. When the number is greater than or equal to the management start reference value, the game history collection for calculating the game history management result is executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, for example, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are cared for in each ball-in portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, a game for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes the management start reference value or more. By not allowing the history to be collected, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball during the above-mentioned operation check from being collected as the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. Become.

  Here, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is “0”. Has become. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233. Is also "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the management start flag is "1", the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and then the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is supplied in a situation where backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. When the supply of No. is started, the value of the management start flag remains "1". In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233. Also, the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is maintained. With the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is "0", the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 and the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232. The values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are also "0".

  Incidentally, when the main RAM 65 clearing process is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main process (FIG. 9), the target of the clearing process is the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack for the specific control. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are areas 222, are excluded from the target of the clearing process. As a result, the game hall manager cannot intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0".

  Further, the main CPU 63 confirms whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) described later, and the abnormality occurs. When it is confirmed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to initialize the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control when an abnormality occurs. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the configuration, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". However, when an abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0". Good. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are determined. The total number is calculated by summing all the values of the counters 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference value "300" (step S4203).

  When a positive determination is made in step S4203, the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4204). Further, all the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4205). As a result, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start reference value. All the information of the game history collected until the number of games corresponding to the above is exceeded is deleted. Therefore, after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10, until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value, the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. It becomes possible not to execute.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4201, the calculation processing of the total number is executed as in step S4202 (step S4206). In other words, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are set as follows. The total number is calculated by summing all. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or larger than the calculation reference number “6000” (step S4207).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4207, arithmetic processing of various parameters is executed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K61 to K65, the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232 are set to K71 to K75, and the high frequency support mode is used. When the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.
61st parameter: total payout number of game balls (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + “K63 + K73 + K83 "×" Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+" K64 + K74 + K84 "x" Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34 ") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA ( Ratio of K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) -The 62nd parameter: the total payout amount of the game balls in the normal time (K61 × “the number of prize balls for winning the prize at the general prize hole 31” + K62 × “the special prize winning device 32” to the special prize winning device 32). "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K64 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in normal time (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65) 63rd parameter: Total payout number of game balls in the open / close execution mode (K71 x "number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K72 x "number of prize balls for winning in the special prize winning device 32" + K73 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K74 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / Total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the opening / closing execution mode Ratio of (K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75) · 64th parameter: total payout number of game balls in high frequency support mode (K81 × "Number of prize balls for winning in the general prize opening 31" + K82 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32" + K83 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K84 x "Second operation Ratio of the total number of game balls (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) discharged from the game area PA in the high-frequency support mode / the 65th parameter: the total number of game balls to the general winning port 31 Proportion of the number of entered balls (K61 + K71 + K81) / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85). Proportion of the total number of game balls discharged from the area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) 67th parameter: (“K62 + K72 + K82” × “K84 number of winning prizes to special electric prize device 32 + K64 number of K ++ 74” +74 “K64 + K”) "Number of prize balls for winning a prize") / Total number of payouts of game balls ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "Number of prize balls for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Ball ball for winning a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32" Number of pieces + "K63 + K73 + K83" x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34"), 68th parameter : "K62 + K72 + K82" x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total number of game balls to be paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "special electric line "Number of prize balls for winning in prize winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" x "Number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "Number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34") After that, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation result in the previous processing times, which are already stored in the calculation result storage area 234, are erased. Even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. Therefore, if the backup power is supplied, the backup power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power, the calculation result storage area 234 stores the information of the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  After that, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4210). With this, triggered by the calculation of the 61st to 68th parameters, it becomes possible to temporarily erase the information of the game history at that time.

  Immediately after the management start flag is set to "1", when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or more than the value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number, steps S4208 to The processing of step S4210 may be executed, and thereafter, the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the calculation reference number.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display processing of step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 73).

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a timing to update the display contents of the game history management result on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the numeral corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the numeral corresponding to the ones digit is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. Then, in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and are the display objects in the final order. After the calculation result of the 68th parameter is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of 61st to 68th parameters is 8, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the process of step S4301 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not the timing has come (step S4302). If a positive determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "7" (step S4304: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S4305).

  The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the 61st to 68th parameters and the possible values of the display target counters "0" to "7". For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the 61st parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “7”. In this case, the 68th parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4304, or if the processing of step S4305 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It is controlled (step S4306). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result storage area 234, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The numeral corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

  Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs the display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a, and in step S4307 the main CPU 63 displays the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b and the third notification. The display data is output to each display IC corresponding to the display device 69c for display. These display ICs can store and hold display data when operating power is supplied, and display contents corresponding to the stored and held display data are continuously displayed on the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display it. Then, by changing the display data by the main CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. As a result, even after the management execution process (FIG. 71), which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, the execution status of the process corresponding to the non-specific control is set. The display corresponding to the display data will be continued on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  After that, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S4308).

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started by executing the display process as described above, the game history management result is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. To be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is continued, and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display device 69a is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~ 69c.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. In the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control by using the specific control program and the specific control data. While information can be stored and information can be read out in the main CPU 63, processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. In this case, the information can be read but the information cannot be stored. Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are capable of storing information and reading information when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, the information can be read but the information cannot be stored. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control are provided. It is possible to handle 224 as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, the storage destination of information in the main RAM 65 can be clearly different between the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, when one of the processes corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information used in the other process can be prevented from being erased.

  The process corresponding to the specific control includes a process for controlling the progress of the game, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control includes a process for managing the game history. As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the non-specific control Stack area 224 is treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thereby, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, for example, the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode It is possible to prevent the information stored in the use counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

  The normal side RAM 65 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234 in which information for managing the game history is stored. This allows the main CPU 63 to complete the processing for managing the game history. Further, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the information on the game history and the information on various parameters calculated using the information on the game history.

  When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from the condition in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, various types of main CPU 63 The information in the register is saved in the main RAM 65. Thereby, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 from being rewritten when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed. Become. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is ended or after the processing is ended, the information saved in the main RAM 65 is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63. As a result, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the specific control from the state of various registers of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Become.

  Various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the condition in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed to the condition to execute the process corresponding to the non-specific control Information of some of the registers is saved in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

  Various registers of the main-side CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from the condition in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed Of the information, the information of the register that is the storage target of the information in the process corresponding to the non-specific control is saved in the main RAM 65. Thereby, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the process corresponding to the specific control can be restarted from the state of the register of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In the main RAM 65, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63.

  When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the WA register, BC register of the main CPU 63, Each information of the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, it becomes possible to save the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 at a preferable timing, and the processing for saving the information corresponds to the processing corresponding to the specific control and the non-specific control. It becomes possible to execute distributed processing.

  The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. In this case, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the processing corresponding to the specific control before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the call of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control or the start of the subroutine and before the change in the stack area 222 for the specific control.

  The information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, but is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 224 for specific control small. In addition, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of information is read out from the later information. Therefore, if the reading order of information is deviated due to some noise or the like, it may occur. All subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

  The stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the condition in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed to the condition to execute the process corresponding to the non-specific control Information is fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. As a result, it is not necessary to secure the capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the main RAM 65, so that the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 can be suppressed accordingly. Even if the stack pointer information is not saved as described above, when the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the situation corresponding to the non-specific control to the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. When the situation in which the corresponding process is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information, and therefore the process corresponding to the non-specific control can be performed without saving the information on the stack pointer as described above. When the processing ends, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Although the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the information in the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, the configuration is such that after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the processing corresponding to the specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Also, after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started for the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63, the main processing is performed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Although it is configured to be saved in the side RAM 65, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information in these registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to each of the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the return of information to the register is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management processing is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the management processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4401 to S4405 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW", the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the specific control work area 221 by a load instruction (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving such information in the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the call of the subroutine or the start of the subroutine is saved. The information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4403). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  After returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, a load instruction as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" is executed to save it in the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S4402. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4402 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S4405). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

  According to the above configuration, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before the switching from the specific control to the non-specific control is saved in the specific control work area 221 instead of the specific control stack area 222. As a result, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Although the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is secured as a dedicated area, it is not limited to this and may be a shared area in which other information can be written. In other words, it is not necessary to save the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in the situation where the management processing is not executed. It is also possible to use a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer when performing arithmetic processing. In this case, since the combined area is surely used to save the information in the flag register when the management process is executed, the shared area is stored as information other than the information in the flag register before the management process is executed. It is necessary to have a configuration in which unnecessary information is written in the shared area.

<17th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management execution processing is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the management execution process executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the non-specific control is started in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD SP, Y (u + 2)”. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address in step S4501.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH WA", a push instruction saves the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 to a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4502). In this case, the WA register information is saved in the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After that, as "PUSH BC", a push instruction saves the information of the BC register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4503). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After that, as "PUSH DE", the push instruction saves the DE register information of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4504). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", a push instruction saves the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4505). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After that, as "PUSH IX", the push instruction saves the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4506). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After that, as "PUSH IY", a push instruction saves the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4507). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After performing the processes of steps S4502 to S4507, the check process is performed (step S4508). When the check process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is provided by the push command to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the checking process are the same as those in the 15th embodiment.

  After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the load pointer returns to the specific control as “LD SP, Y (r + α)” by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address in step S4509. The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as the "POP IY", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4510). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as "POP IX", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4511). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Then, as "POP HL", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4512). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Then, as "POP DE", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4513). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as "POP BC", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4514). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as "POP WA", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4515). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  By executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515, a process corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before.

  In addition to the flag register, various registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4502 to S4507, information of each of the general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, which are some of the registers, WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register. Are saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4508) corresponding to the non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the stack area 224 for non-specific control before executing the check process (step S4508), the information in these registers used in the specific control is controlled by non-specific control. It is possible to evacuate before the start of. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the stack area 224 for the non-specific control is restored to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the states of these registers can be restored. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Further, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control is used. Register information is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by selectively saving information in the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the information in the register as described above while securing a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used in the check processing.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management execution processing is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution process are executed in the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the non-specific control is started in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD SP, Y (u + 2)”. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address in (step S4601).

  Thereafter, as "LD (_ALLBUF), ALL", the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the ALL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S4602). As a result, not only the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register that are used in the check processing that is the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but also all other registers are included. The register information is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, there is no need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

  Here, the registers to be saved include a flag register. The information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 70), but the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in step S4602. To be done. This eliminates the need to selectively save the information in the register of the main CPU 63, including the information in the flag register. Further, even if the information in the flag register is duplicated and saved as described above, after the management execution processing is completed, in step S3804 of the management processing (FIG. 70), the special control stack area 222 is removed from the main CPU 63. Since the information is restored to the flag register of the above, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state immediately before the execution of the management execution process. Becomes

  After that, a check process is executed (step S4603). When the check process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is provided by the push command to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the checking process are the same as those in the 15th embodiment.

  After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the load pointer is set to “LD SP, Y (r + α)”, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the specific control. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address in (step S4604). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as "LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)", the information saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the register corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 by the load instruction (step S4605). This makes it possible to restore each piece of information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, the information of the register of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, but is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to keep the capacity of 224 small. In addition, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of information is read out from the later information. Therefore, if the reading order of information is deviated due to some noise or the like, it may occur. All subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

  Further, when the information of the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, and HL register used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control are performed. , IX register and IY register, and information of all registers including other registers are collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, there is no need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

  Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to all the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be restored in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<19th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management execution processing is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as "LD (_SPBUF), SP", the load instruction saves the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the SP buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4701). As a result, the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is saved is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control.

  After that, similarly to step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the non-specific control is started to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD SP, Y (u + 2)”. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address in (step S4702).

  After that, as a “PUSH ALL”, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is transferred from the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control to the storage area by the push command. It is saved in continuous storage areas (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 cannot be stored in one storage area in the non-specific control stack area 224, the current state of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 is as described above. The storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer and the storage area continuous from the storage area are saved in the register information. Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order with respect to the storage area in which the last information is stored when the information of all the registers is saved.

  After that, a check process is executed (step S4704). When the check process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is provided by the push command to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address. The contents of the checking process are the same as those in the 15th embodiment.

  After that, as a "POP ALL", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the storage area continuous from the storage area by the pop instruction Are overwritten on the registers corresponding to the respective main CPUs 63 (step S4705). This makes it possible to restore the information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  After that, the information saved in the SP buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD SP, (_SPBUF)" (step S4706). As a result, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the information in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA register, the BC register, and the DE used in the check process that is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Not only the registers, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, but also the information of all other registers are collectively saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  The information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. Thereby, even if the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is changed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the specific control is performed. When returning to the corresponding process, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be returned to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to all the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be restored in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configurations of the management process and the management execution process are different from those of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4801 to S4811 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S4801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the call of the subroutine or the start of the subroutine is saved. Information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4803). Further, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4804). Also, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4805). Also, as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by a load instruction (step S4806). Also, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4807). Also, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4808).

  In addition to the flag register, various registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are set. Clear "0". The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) corresponding to the non-specific control. Before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the states of these registers are cleared by clearing "0" to the management execution processing (step S4809) which is the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

  The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

  After performing the processes of steps S4803 to S4808, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S4802 as the "POP PSW" by the pop command is used as the main CPU 63. It returns to the flag register (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4802 was last executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  After that, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (step S4811). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the management execution process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4901 to S4909 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is set to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction at the start of non-specific control. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address (step S4901).

  After that, a check process is executed (step S4902). When executing the check process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program is returned to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. The contents of the checking process are the same as those in the 15th embodiment.

  Thereafter, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4903). Also, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4904). Also, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4905). Further, as "LD HL, 0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4906). Also, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4907). Also, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4908).

  The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) corresponding to the non-specific control as described above. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to the return from the processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the states of these registers can be The state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the side CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

  Further, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is not specified after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the specific control ends.

  After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the load pointer is set to “LD SP, Y (r + α)”, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the specific control. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address in (step S4909). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register of the main CPU 63 And the IY register are cleared to "0". This eliminates the need to save the information of each register in the main RAM 65. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving these pieces of information.

  Also, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 are set. The configuration is such that "0" is cleared. As a result, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  The state in which each of the registers is cleared to “0” is the state when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting each of the registers to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. ..

  When starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the registers for which the “0” is cleared are some of the various registers of the main CPU 63. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting each of the registers to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

  In the configuration in which the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to “0” when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, Registers other than "0" are not cleared. This makes it possible to prevent the information required in the process corresponding to the specific control from being erased at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Information of registers other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, there is no need to secure an area for saving the information in the main RAM 65.

  The information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This information is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the registers are cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the specific control is performed after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is possible to prevent the processing from being affected.

  It should be noted that instead of the configuration of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), The configuration may be such that the register is initialized. That is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started, each register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0” and then the information setting of each register is performed so as to be in the initial state, but step S4803. In step S4808, each register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, in each of the steps S4903 to S4908, the setting of each register is performed so as to be in the initial state, so that the state of each register is not specified when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to restore the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the control is started.

  Further, in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 are replaced with a configuration in which they are cleared to “0”. The configuration may be such that "1" is set in all the registers. In this case, also in steps S4903 to S4908, by setting all of the above registers to "1", when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of each register is processed corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the start of.

  Although the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the information in the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, the configuration is such that after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the processing corresponding to the specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Further, the process of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" corresponds to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the process of clearing these registers to “0” may be performed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends, the processing for clearing each register to “0” is performed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The processing of clearing each register to “0” may be performed in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

  Further, in the management process (FIG. 81), the process of "PUSH PSW" in step S4802 is executed before setting "0" to each register in steps S4803 to S4808, but instead of this, , "PUSH PSW" processing in step S4802 is executed after "0" is set in each register in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing is read in step S4809. It may be configured to be. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register, which has been changed by the load instruction in steps S4803 to S4808, in the stack area 222 for specific control.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for collecting information on the game history is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of this embodiment.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65 as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, unlike the fifteenth embodiment, the MPU 62 is electrically connected with the management RAM 241. That is, the management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 built in the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control as in the fifteenth embodiment. ing. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the specific control by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main ROM 64, the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 and When the stack area 222 for specific control is used and the main CPU 63 uses the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control in the main ROM 64 to execute the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65 are used.

  The management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. The contents of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment. Also in the present embodiment, the management execution process including the check process is executed as the process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. Then, in the check process, similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the game history is collected by updating the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and at the same time, the game history is collected. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the collected game history are written in the calculation result storage area 234. That is, since the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for the non-specific control.

  In addition, when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated by collecting the game history and using the collected history information, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 of the main RAM 65 are Used as appropriate.

  According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to store the collected game history information while not increasing the storage capacity required in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65, and use the game history. It is possible to store the calculated 61st to 68th parameters. Further, it becomes possible to increase the storage capacity for storing the information of the game history while using the general-purpose MPU 62.

  The non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 of the main RAM 65 are appropriately used when collecting the game history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information. To be done. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the processing speed from extremely decreasing when the processing related to the history information is executed.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the normal RAM counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241, the first embodiment described above is used. A storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the form may be set. In this case, although it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is used as a storage unit for storing the history information. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with an increase in storage capacity.

<Twenty-second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5001 to S5019 in the main process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S5003), and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned on using the setting key (step S5004), and the inner frame It is determined with respect to 13 whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S5005), and it is determined with respect to the outer frame 11 whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state (step S5006).

  In the present embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door opening sensor The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 sends an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state.

  When the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, a clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S5007). .. In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, in the specific control work area 221, the specific control is performed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. The work area 221 for use is cleared to "0". As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to “0”, so that the winning / winning lottery is selected regardless of the winning / winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, the hold storage area 65a and the universal electric power reserve area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the general figure display section is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”.

  In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is being pressed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

  When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S5008). The power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is generated. Will be set to "1". If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S5009). .. When the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or when the positive determination is made in step S5009, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the value is normal (step S5010). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the set value set in the set value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and abnormal when "0" or 7 or more. Judge that there is.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibiting process, an infinite loop is performed after the error notifying process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of the error is performed (step S5011). The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a clearing process (step S5018) at the time of updating the setting, which will be described later.

  When a positive determination is made in all of steps S5008 to S5010, power-on setting processing is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S5012 is completed and the process of step S5013 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S5012 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S5013 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

  After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S5013 to S5016. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S5013 to S5016 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processing as steps S113 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and a positive determination is made in all of steps S5004 to S5006, processing for updating the set value is executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5017). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the subsequent clearing processing (step S5018) at the time of updating the setting, the book before the clearing processing at the time of updating the setting value is executed. It is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  After that, a clear process at the time of updating the setting is executed (step S5018). In the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether the win / loss lot mode in the work area 221 for the specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. "clear. As a result, the game times are not being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. There is a certain situation. Further, the hold storage area 65a and the universal electric power reserve area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special figure display section 37a is deleted and the general figure display section is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the setting, the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”.

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the area indicating whether the win / win lottery mode is the high-probability mode is not cleared to “0”, so that the win / win lottery mode is executed even if the setting value update process (step S5019) is executed. Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it becomes possible to specify the set value set before the clearing process at the time of setting update is executed.

  In the clear processing at the time of updating the settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the setting value update processing capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

  After that, after executing the setting value updating process in step S5019, the process proceeds to step S5012. The setting value update process will be described below. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process. The processing of steps S5101 to S5114 in the setting value update processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, "1" is set to the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5101). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

  After that, the display start processing of the set value is executed (step S5102). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After that, it is determined whether or not one gaming ball is detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one gaming ball is detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5105). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S5106: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S5107). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the processing of step S5107 is executed, display update processing of the set value is executed (step S5108). In the display update process of the set value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After executing the process of step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. When one gaming ball is not detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the processes after step S5104 are executed again. When one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion part 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, it is not specified whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state, but it is specified whether or not the switching from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and that the switching has occurred. If specified, an affirmative decision is made in step S5109.

  If it has not been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. As a result, the process is on standby until the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When it is switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S5110). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, the display of the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is started on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  After that, a comparison process of set values is executed (step S5111). In the setting value comparison processing, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 matches the information stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value set in the current set value updating process.

  If the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the same as the set value set in the current set value update processing (step S5112: NO), the A notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the notification process at the time of non-change, a setting maintenance command indicating that the set value has not been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting maintenance, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the sound “setting maintenance.”. In addition, the character image of "Maintain settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting maintenance command is transmitted, and is terminated when the notification execution period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can recognize that the set value has been maintained. In the notification process during non-change, the set value is maintained by setting the display content of at least one of the first to third display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting maintenance. It may be configured to notify that, or may be configured to perform external output indicating that the set value is maintained.

  If the set value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped and the set value that was set in this set value update processing are not the same (step S5112: YES), change The notification process at the time is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the set value has been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting change, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound of “setting change”. In addition, the character image of “setting change” is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting change command is transmitted, and is terminated when the notification execution period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can know that the set value has been changed. In the notification process at the time of change, the set value is changed by setting the display content on at least one of the first to third display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting change. May be informed, or an external output indicating that the set value has been changed may be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the set value updating process, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the reset button 68c is pressed and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. This makes it difficult to execute the setting value update process illegally.

  Further, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state in order to execute the set value updating process. As a result, even if an attempt is made to execute the setting value update process illegally, the fraudulent act becomes conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the manager of the gaming hall concerned It's easier to find fraud.

  In particular, in order to execute the set value updating process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 required to expose the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required, It is possible to make the work of the fraudulent activity complicated and to make the fraudulent activity noticeable.

  Further, in the configuration that does not return to the process for advancing the game when the set value update process is not completed, in order to confirm the set value selected in the set value update process and end the set value update process, It is necessary to insert a game ball into the outlet 24a and cause the outlet detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the setting value update process is illegally executed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the operation for subsequently ending the setting value update process and returning to the process for advancing the game.

  Further, the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value selected in the set value updating process are compared to determine whether or not both set values are the same. The notification corresponding to the crab is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value updating process.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in a situation where the processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are executed in the main process (FIG. 84). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

  In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  After that, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When the setting confirmation process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the setting confirmation process set in the specific control program is executed. However, when the subroutine program is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing after execution of is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the setting confirmation process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. The processes of steps S5301 to S5312 in the setting confirmation process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, it is determined whether or not the set value corresponding to the set value counter information in the specific control work area 221 is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S5301). When a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether it is neither the game time nor the opening / closing execution mode (step S5302), and the variable display time of the pattern in the universal figure display unit 38a and the universal utility object 34a are opened. It is determined whether or not any of the normal electric open states that can be in the state (step S5303), it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5304), and the outer frame. It is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to 11 (step S5305), and it is determined whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S5306). Whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 similarly to step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 84), and whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. This determination is made based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 as in step S5006 in the main process (FIG. 84).

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, this setting confirmation process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S5307 to S5309. When a positive determination is made in all of step S5302 to step S5306, setting value display start processing is executed (step S5307). In the display start processing of the set value, the third notification display device 69c is display-controlled so that the set value number corresponding to the information of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is displayed. When confirming the setting value, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by visually checking the third notification display device 69c.

  Then, "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5308). The game stop flag is a situation in which a positive determination is made in step S5207 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) and the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed, that is, the execution of processing for advancing the game should be stopped. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not there is. When the game stop flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), whereby the process of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed. As a result, the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. However, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S5201 to S5205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) is executed, so that the setting value is being confirmed. Even if the power failure is monitored, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

  After that, the confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S5309). Upon receiving the confirmation notification start command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting confirmation, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the voice “Setting confirmation is in progress”. .. In addition, the character image "Setting confirmation is in progress." Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are continued until the confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that external output indicating that the set value is being confirmed is performed.

  As described above, on condition that it is neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode, and further, neither the variable display times of the picture in the universal figure display section 38a nor the universal electric open state in which the general electric accessory 34a can be in an open state, By making the display for confirming the set value displayed on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the set value confirmation work from being performed in the situation where the game is being played. It will be possible.

  Further, in order to display the confirmation of the set value on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. This makes it difficult to display the confirmation of the set value illegally.

  Further, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally display the confirmation of the set value, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, the fraudulent act becomes conspicuous, and the game hall management It becomes easier for a person to discover the wrongdoing.

  In particular, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60, By requiring the opening operation of the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to complicate the work of the fraudulent act, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off (step S5310). If the OFF operation has been performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), whereby the process of steps S5208 to S5221 is executed. As a result, the state in which the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped is released.

  After that, the confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S5312). Upon receiving the confirmation notification end command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the setting values in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are being confirmed.

  Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86), after the setting confirmation processing of step S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" in the setting confirmation processing of step S5206, an affirmative decision is made in step S5207, and steps S5208 to S5221 are executed. Do not execute the process. Further, even when the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection processing in step S5205, a positive determination is made in step S5207, and the processing in steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed.

  In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data. Further, in step S5221, the same process as step S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, in step S5220, RAM monitoring processing is executed. When executing the RAM monitoring process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the program for specific control is executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after executing the RAM monitoring process. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the RAM monitoring process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process. The processes of steps S5401 to S5412 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, the monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 221 for specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of observing, and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, the storage area is determined to be abnormal when the value is “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5401 (step S5402: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5401 (step S5402: NO), the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the stack area 222 for specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of observing, and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, the storage area is determined to be abnormal when the value is “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5403 (step S5404: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5403 (step S5404: NO), the process proceeds to step S5405.

  In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control is abnormal due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but, for example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written under various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of observing whether or not and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, the storage area is determined to be abnormal when the value is “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5405 (step S5406: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5405 (step S5406: NO), the process proceeds to step S5407.

  In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the non-specific control stack area 224 is abnormal due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but, for example, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written under various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of observing whether or not and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, the storage area is determined to be abnormal when the value is “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5407 (step S5408: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5409). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5410) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of.

  After that, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5410). In the clear processing at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to “0”, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack for non-specific control are provided. The area 224 is cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process, an abnormality occurs in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. When it is specified that the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the non-specific control Clear the stack area 224 of “0”. Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some sort of information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, neither the process corresponding to the specific control nor the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed in that state. It becomes possible to do so.

  When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the information on the return address after the execution of the RAM monitoring process is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process of step S5412 is ended, and then the process is uniquely returned to a predetermined program. Specifically, the processing is uniquely returned to the processing of step S5013 in the main processing (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the abnormal time has occurred is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the voice “Forced clear.”. In addition, the character image "Forced clear." Is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can recognize that the main RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

  After that, the setting value update processing is executed (step S5412). In other words, when the clear processing at the time of abnormality occurs, "0" is cleared including the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, so that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is reset. In order to do so, set value update processing is executed. The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as step S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is confirmed by detecting the game ball with the outlet detection sensor 48a. The set value in the middle of updating and the confirmed set value are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. After that, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the ending condition of the set value updating process is satisfied.

  Here, it is not determined that the termination condition is satisfied only by the setting key insertion portion 68a being in the OFF state, and the termination condition is determined when the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined that it has been established. When the setting value updating process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88), the setting key inserting unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value updating process. In order to be established, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion portion 68a, perform the ON operation once, and then perform the OFF operation. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value updating process from ending even though the game hall manager has not performed a regular operation.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the ending condition of the set value update process is satisfied, by executing step S5111 in the set value update process (FIG. 85), It is compared whether or not the set value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 and the set value currently set in the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting value set before the execution of the clearing process (step S5410) at the time of abnormality is the same as the setting value set in the current setting value updating process. When both set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the notification process at the time of non-change (step S5113) is executed to perform the setting maintenance notification already described. On the other hand, when the two set values are different (step S5112: YES), the notification process at the time of change (step S5114) is executed so that the setting change notification described above is performed.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In order to execute the set value update process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the reset button 68c is pressed. The front door frame 14 needs to be in the open state, and the gaming machine body 12 needs to be in the open state. This makes it difficult to execute the setting value update process illegally.

  In order to execute the set value updating process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to execute the setting value update process illegally, the fraudulent act becomes conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the manager of the gaming hall concerned It's easier to find fraud.

  In particular, in order to execute the set value updating process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 required to expose the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required, It is possible to make the work of the fraudulent activity complicated and to make the fraudulent activity noticeable.

  When the set value update process is not completed, in the configuration that does not return to the process for advancing the game, in order to confirm the set value selected in the set value update process and end the set value update process, It is necessary to insert a game ball into 24a and have the outlet detection sensor 48a detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the setting value update process is illegally executed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the operation for subsequently ending the setting value update process and returning to the process for advancing the game.

  The set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value selected in the set value updating process are compared to determine whether or not both set values are the same. The corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value updating process.

  The setting value is set on the condition that neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode, nor the variable display times of the picture in the universal figure display unit 38a and the universal electric open state in which the general electric accessory 34a can be opened. By making the display for confirmation displayed on the third notification display device 69c, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value confirmation work from being performed in a situation where a game is being played. ..

  In order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the gaming machine body 12 needs to be in an open state. This makes it difficult to display the confirmation of the set value illegally.

  In order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally display the confirmation of the set value, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, the fraudulent act becomes conspicuous, and the game hall management It becomes easier for a person to discover the wrongdoing.

  In particular, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60, By requiring the opening operation of the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to complicate the work of the fraudulent act, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

  When it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. Clears the work area 221 for specific control excluding the copy area to "0" and sets the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". "clear. As a result, if there is a possibility that some sort of information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, both the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are executed in that state. It is possible to prevent it.

  In the process corresponding to the specific control, information abnormality occurs not only in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, but also in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. Whether or not it is monitored. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control are separately monitored to monitor whether or not an information abnormality has occurred.

  When it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. In the processing corresponding to the specific control, not only the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control but also the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are “0. It will be cleared. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are separately performed to clear “0”.

  When the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed due to the occurrence of the information abnormality, the set value update processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding even though the set value is not set. In this case, if the set value that was set before the clear processing at the time of abnormality is the same as the set value that was set by the setting value update processing after the execution of the clear processing at the time of abnormality Is notified of the setting maintenance. As a result, even if the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed, the setting maintenance notification will be performed by resetting the set value that was set in the previous situation, and the clear processing at the time of abnormality will be executed. Also, it becomes possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. By the way, since it is common to record the set value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, the set value update processing after the execution of the clear processing at the time of abnormality so that the recorded set value is obtained. Can be performed.

  It should be noted that the condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be different from the above-described embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a main process which is another form. In the main processing, the same processing as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment is executed in steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520. On the other hand, in the main process, in step S5507, it is determined whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 that is operated to fire the game ball in the game area PA has been rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Yes (step S5505: YES), the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If so (step S5507: YES), the set value update process (step S5520) is executed. Accordingly, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and the ON operation is performed, but also the firing is performed. It is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the operation handle of the operation device 28 is rotated. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value. It should be noted that, in step S5507, it is not determined whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 has been rotated from the initial rotation position, but it is determined whether the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. It may be configured.

  Further, as a condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outside Although both of the conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are set for the frame 11, only one of these conditions may be set.

  In addition, the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed is set as the condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. However, the configuration may be such that the condition is not set.

  Further, as a condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. The configuration may be such that the condition that power supply has been started is set. Accordingly, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key inserting section 68a and the ON operation is performed, but also the through operation is performed. It is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the game balls retained in the gate 35. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value.

  Further, the content of the operation for confirming the set value in the set value update processing may be different from that of the above-described embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing a setting value updating process which is another form. In the set value update processing, the same processing as step S5101 to step S5102 and step S5104 to step S5114 of the set value update processing (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment is executed in step S5601 to step S5602 and step S5604 to step S5614. . On the other hand, in the setting value updating process, in step S5603, the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a, instead of determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. It is determined whether the ON duration is equal to or longer than the termination reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). Then, when a positive determination is made in step S5603, the set value being selected is confirmed, and the flow proceeds to step S5609. According to this configuration, in order to confirm the set value being selected, it is necessary to intentionally retain the game ball in the through gate 35 for at least the end reference period. The game ball staying in the through gate 35 for more than the end reference period does not occur in a situation where a normal game is being played. This makes it possible to make the condition for confirming the selected setting value not satisfied or difficult to be satisfied in a situation where a normal game is being played. Further, even if the setting value updating process is started due to injustice, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the operation for confirming the setting value being selected in the setting value updating process.

  Further, in the set value updating process, the selected set value may be determined when the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. The configuration may be such that the set value being selected is confirmed when the setting is performed.

  Further, in the set value update processing, the set value being selected may be fixed when the special electric prize detection sensor 45a detects that the game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 provided with the opening / closing member. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the selected set value is confirmed when the second operation opening detection sensor 47a detects that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 provided with the opening / closing member. In this case, in order to confirm the set value being selected, it is necessary to manually maintain the game ball after opening the target ball entry portion manually, making it difficult to illegally change the set value. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in the set value update processing, selection is made based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance part after it has been detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance part. The set value may be fixed. In this case, in order to confirm the set value being selected, it is necessary to enter the game balls into the plurality of ball entry parts by maintenance in a predetermined order, so it is difficult to illegally change the set value. Is possible. In this case, the workability of the regular work is not extremely reduced by making the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part both ball entry parts without the opening / closing member. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, in the setting value updating process, the setting key inserting section 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state so that the selected setting value is confirmed and the ending condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied.

  Further, the operation for updating the setting value by one step in the setting value update processing is not limited to the configuration in which the update button 68b is pressed, and the setting value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c. The configuration may be updated.

  In the case where the reset button 68c is being pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is being turned on by the setting key, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. If the front door frame 14 is not open to the frame 13 or the gaming machine main body 12 is not open to the outer frame 11, a clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the clear process at the time of non-setting update may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the clear processing at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the intention of the manager of the game hall.

  In addition, in a case where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned on by the setting key, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. If the front door frame 14 is not open to the frame 13 or the gaming machine main body 12 is not open to the outer frame 11, a clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be such that the clear process at the time of non-setting update is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update illegally.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the 22nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 22nd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S5701 to S5720 in the main process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5703), and based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, the outer frame 11 In contrast, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). When a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are executed. The processing of these steps S5706 to S5714 is the same as the processing of steps S5008 to S5016 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  When a positive determination is made in all of steps S5703 to S5705, selection processing is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, the status can be either the status where the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value updating processing is not executed, or the status where the clear processing at the time of setting updating is executed and the setting value updating processing is executed. A process of deciding whether to be based on the selection operation by the manager of the game hall is executed. Specifically, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the state in which one of the above situations is selected is switched to the state in which the other situation is selected. Note that the selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operation unit. Further, when the state where the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is selected, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is displayed. When the state where the third notification display device 69c is turned off and the setting update process is executed and the setting value update process is executed is selected, “O” is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Is displayed and the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. Further, when the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the status of the selected side among the above statuses is fixed as the current selection target. To do.

  When the update button 68b is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the status of the selected side among the above statuses is fixed as the current selection target. The configuration may be adopted, and when the other operation unit is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the situation of the selected side among the above situations is selected this time. It may be configured to be determined as a target. Further, the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 may be rotated to determine the selected situation among the above situations as the current selection target.

  In the process for selection, when the situation where the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed. (Step S5717). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S5007 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  In the process for selection, when the situation of executing the clear process at the time of updating the setting and executing the setting value updating process is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the copying process of the setting value is executed (step S5716). In step S5718, the clearing process at the time of updating the setting is executed (step S5719), and the setting value updating process is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of these steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as the steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not provided, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed, and the clear process at the time of setting update is executed. At the same time, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to select which of the situations in which the setting value update processing is to be executed.

  Further, not only when the setting value updating process is executed but also when the clearing process at the time of non-setting updating is executed, the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 when the reset button 68c is pressed. It is necessary not only to start but also to open the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 and to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update illegally.

  In addition, as conditions for executing the selection process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame. Although both of the conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are set for 11, the configuration may be such that only one of these conditions is set.

  Further, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated is added. As the configuration, the condition that the firing operation device 28 is touched may be added, and the condition that the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a may be added. Good.

<Twenty-fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring processing is different from that of the 22nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 22nd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5801 to S5814 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, the monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5801 (step S5802: YES), the processes of steps S5805-S5808 are executed.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5801 (step S5802: NO), the monitoring process of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5803). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5803 (step S5804: YES), the processes of steps S5805-S5808 are executed.

  For details of the processing in steps S5805 to S5808, first, a setting value copy processing is executed (step S5805). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the set value counter information is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5806) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of.

  After that, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5806). In the abnormal clear processing, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control is performed excluding the copy area. The work area 221 for clearing is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed in that state. It is possible to prevent it. Further, even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. By not doing so, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible not to.

  When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the information on the return address after the execution of the RAM monitoring process is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the process of step S5808 is terminated, and then a specific program is uniquely restored. Specifically, the processing is uniquely returned to the processing of step S5013 in the main processing (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the abnormal time has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5807). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the voice “Forced clear.”. In addition, the character image "Forced clear." Is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 have been forcibly cleared.

  After that, the setting value update processing is executed (step S5808). The processing contents of the setting value update processing are the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in both step S5801 and step S5803 (step S5802 and step S5804: NO), monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5809 (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” (step S5811). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Accordingly, even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

  In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", but the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”, but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to “0”. It may be configured. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to “0”. It may be configured.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5810 or the processing of step S5811 is executed, the monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S5812). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5812 (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” (step S5814). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

  According to the above configuration, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 is excluded except for the copy area. Is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed in that state. It is possible to prevent it.

  Even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0" due to the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible to do so.

  Even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" when the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control is triggered. It becomes possible.

  Even if the information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the work area 221 for the specific control, the stack area 222 for the specific control, and the work area 223 for the non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

  When an information error occurs in the specific control work area 221, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, while the specific control stack area 222 is set to “0”. The configuration may not be cleared to "0".

  Further, when an information abnormality has occurred in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, while the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to “0”. May be In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the processing in steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 is different from that of the 22nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 22nd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5901 to S5908 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, the monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5901 (step S5902: YES), the processes of steps S5905-S5908 are executed.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5901 (step S5902: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5903). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5903 (step S5904: YES), the processes of steps S5905-S5908 are executed.

  For details of the processing in steps S5905 to S5908, first, a setting value copy processing is executed (step S5905). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the set value counter information is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5906) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of.

  After that, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the abnormal clear processing, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control is performed excluding the copy area. The work area 221 for clearing is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed in that state. It is possible to prevent it. Further, even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. By not doing so, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible not to.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the abnormal time has occurred is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S5907). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the speaker unit 54. The voice that "Forced clear has been executed for specific control" is output from. In addition, the character image "Forced clear has been executed for specific control." Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 have been forcibly cleared.

  After that, the setting value update process is executed (step S5908). The processing contents of the setting value update processing are the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  As described above, in the RAM monitoring process executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data, information abnormality monitoring is performed on the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. However, no information abnormality monitoring is performed on the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The monitoring of the information abnormality of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control in which the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data are used. Is executed.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the management execution process executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. Note that the management execution process is executed by reading the program of the subroutine in the management process (FIG. 70) as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, the processes of steps S6001 to S6016 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  In steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016, the same processes as steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment are executed. Further, in step S6009, another monitoring process is executed. When the separate monitoring process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed, but when executing the subroutine program, the separate monitoring process is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the later management execution processing is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. Then, when the separate monitoring process ends, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. The processes of steps S6101 to S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, the monitoring process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S6101). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S6101 (step S6102: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6103). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Accordingly, even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

  In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", but the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may be configured.

  After that, a clear notification process is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forcible clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and causes the speaker unit 54 to “forcibly clear history information. The voice is output. Further, the character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." Is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6102 or when the processing of step S6104 is executed, the monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S6105). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S6105 (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” (step S6107). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

  After that, a clear notification process is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forcible clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and causes the speaker unit 54 to display "the stack for non-specific control is It was forcibly cleared. "Is output. Further, the character display device 41 is made to display the character image "The non-specific control stack has been forcibly cleared." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can understand that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the program address of step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is uniquely set as the information of the return address after the execution of the separate monitoring process. .. As a result, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the program that should be restored in the management execution process. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  According to the above configuration, monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main CPU 63, and Monitoring of whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. Thereby, not only the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used are clearly distinguished by the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but also the area of the main RAM 65 to be monitored. It is also possible to clearly distinguish 221 to 224.

  When the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, it is the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control and is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The saved information is also cleared to "0". In this case, even if the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, it may not be possible to return to the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control starts. Therefore, when the work area 2223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may be cleared to "0". In addition, in the configuration, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”, so when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control, the specific control is performed. The setting value updating process may be executed first as the corresponding process.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following different embodiment may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated per unit game is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode. The number of times the open / close execution mode is generated may be divided by the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA to calculate the result. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration is calculated in which the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated is divided by the total number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34. May be Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (2) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode for the number of times of the high frequency support mode and the number of times of opening / closing execution mode per unit game time. However, in addition to or instead of this, the result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA may be calculated. Good. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It may be configured. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (3) As a game result that triggers the opening and closing execution mode, not only a big hit result but also a small hit result may be present. When the small hit result is obtained, the open / close execution mode is generated, but the win / loss lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open / close execution mode. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode that results in a small hit may be a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when the big hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is stored in the history memory 117, and when the small hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit result is the history. It may be configured to be stored in the memory for use 117. Further, in this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 may be used to calculate the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the big hit result and the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the small hit result. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  Further, the probability of winning the small hit result may be changed according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may not be changed. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning the small hit result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the small hit result may be. It may be configured to have a low probability of performing.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the small hit result exists, the holding information acquired when the game ball enters the first operation port 33 and the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the second operation port 34. When the jackpot result is different from the suspension information, the distribution ratio of the types of jackpot results is different, and when aiming to enter the first working opening 33, the variable display unit 36 is used in the game area PA. Also, the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side region, and when aiming to enter the second operation port 34, the game ball flows down the right side region of the variable display unit 36 in the game region PA. The shooting operation may be performed as described above, and the small hit result may be generated based on the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33.

In the configuration, the following 51st parameter may be present as a result of managing the game history. It should be noted that the period obtained by adding the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operation port 33 and the execution period of the low frequency support mode instead of the opening / closing execution mode is the normal period. To do. In addition, the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entered K51, and the number of balls entered into the general prize opening 31 during the period of normal is the number K52 of balls entered. The number of balls entered is K53, the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 during the normal period is the number of balls entered K54, and the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 during the normal period is the number of balls entered K55.
The 51st parameter: the total payout number of game balls in the normal period (K52 x "the number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K53 x "the number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32" + K54 x "first" Percentage of total number of game balls (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55) discharged from the technique area PA in the normal period) In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, when the winning probability of the small hit result varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Becomes Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is erased when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small hit result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  (4) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs Thus, history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence may be calculated for each type of jackpot result. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and thirty-first to fourty-second parameters are periodically provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various parameters are calculated when the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA becomes the number of calculation triggers (for example, 10,000). The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the number of times the game times are executed is the number of times the calculation is triggered (for example, 1000 times). In this case, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" at the timing when various parameters are calculated.

  (6) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, and the thirty-first parameters each time the calculation timing of various parameters is reached. Although all of the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one part of the various parameters described above is a calculation target at one calculation timing, and the calculation timing is changed every time. The parameter groups to be calculated may be sequentially changed. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the second to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. The 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the calculation target may be changed in the above-described order each time the calculation timing is reached. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameters when one calculation timing is reached.

  (7) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters may be calculated using history information in the history memory 117 on condition that a game is being played. For example, the calculation of various parameters may be performed under the condition that the game balls are supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being unnecessarily repeated even when a game is not being played. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (8) The first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Further, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. In the main RAM 65, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be provided. The configuration may be such that the function of the storage memory 171 is fulfilled. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are fulfilled in the main RAM 65, when the clear processing (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed, A part or all of the area corresponding to each of the memory 117, the operation result memory 131 and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to “0”, and the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131 and the separate storage. Areas corresponding to the respective memory 171 may be excluded from the target of clearing “0”, and may be cleared to “0” when the corresponding clearing condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main side RAM 65, the manual operation content for executing the clear processing may be different between the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131 and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas. Good. Further, the function of the management IC 66 may be fulfilled by the voice emission control device 81.

  (9) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, and the calculation is performed. The configuration may be such that various parameters stored in the result memory 131 are deleted. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed after the new setting of the setting state is performed. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (10) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the set value updating process), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the history memory 117 may not be cleared. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, the area for storing the set value in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in, the management side CPU 112 may output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

  Further, when the signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is not executed, and the management CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has been changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the clear process of the history memory 117.

  (11) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the set value updating process), When the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the arithmetic processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated when the setting value is newly set, even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, the area for storing the set value in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in, the management side CPU 112 may output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

  Further, when the signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when it is determined that the setting value has not been changed by the management CPU 112, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not executed, and the setting is performed by the management CPU 112. When it is specified that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

  (12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, various parameters may be calculated by various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. Instead, the various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 at an early stage. Become.

  (13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. It may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing another operation. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171.

  (14) All of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are the targets for storing the history information (or the entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is the storage target of the history information. May be For example, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 may be the target of storing history information, or the general winning opening 31 may be the target of storing history information. It ’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

  (15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in association with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration in which 118a to 118c are set is not limited to this, the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry portion includes a plurality of ball entry portions of the same type. In addition to the configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entrance detection sensors in accordance with that, it may be configured to be transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

  (16) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is used for management by the main CPU 63. Although the configuration is such that it is transmitted to the IC 66, the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

  (17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. The transmission to the main CPU 63 is performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, bidirectional communication between the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 is possible, and The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence information is received from the IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 stores and holds it. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

  (18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. Is transmitted using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship A dedicated signal path for transmitting information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 from the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 sends information to the management IC 66, but the management IC 66 does not send information to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main-side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting the command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the voice emission control device 81, the notification corresponding to the content of the various parameters is executed by using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It may be configured to.

  (20) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 is controlled based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated by using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like to notify the contents of the calculated various parameters. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the last business day is normal at the start of the game hall business. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (21) In the case where the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition cancel operation is performed. The game may not be started at. As a configuration for preventing the game from being started, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is not allowed to be launched, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated, and a first operating port It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the win / no determination process is not executed even if a win is generated in 33 or the second operating port 34. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, the operation means may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation in which the entering mode of the game balls in the game area PA is abnormal. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is abnormal. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (22) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a in the first to fourteenth embodiments is stored in the history memory 117, various parameters are calculated using the history information. The configuration may be such that it is not executed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the operator of the reading operation may calculate various parameters using the read history information. Of course, the external device may be configured to execute the calculation of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 In the above, the configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters using history information and information output of history information or various parameters can be performed. As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

  (24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 also serves as the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the external device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the external device is the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. It may be configured separately. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the operation result memory 131 are not limited to the configuration provided as a non-volatile storage unit such as a flash memory. However, for example, one of these memories 116, 117, 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, so that the main side Information may be stored and held even when the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Good.

  (26) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and performs history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. The configuration to be executed is not limited, and a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. More specifically, regarding the configuration, in the case of the first embodiment, for example, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball. The correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the RTC 115 information at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball, that hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Further, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at the time when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips or may be provided as separate substrates, and different control devices may be provided. It may be configured as.

  (28) Regarding the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the number of game balls is measured, while the number of game balls such as the general winning hole 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to the payout of the prize balls and the entry into the privilege-triggered entry portion that triggers the winning / disapproval determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the entry frequency of the game balls into each privilege-triggered ball portion with respect to the total number of discharged game balls, while allowing the entry history of the game balls into the bonus-triggered ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (29) The predetermined events that trigger the storage of history information may include those other than those in each of the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the timing at which the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing at which the full state is started, and the timing at which the full state is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the fact that the ball is in a no-ball state, the timing when the no-ball state is started, and the timing when the no-ball state is released may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

  (30) In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal and is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command transmitted from the main CPU 63. May be Further, in the first embodiment, it is set in advance that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 when the type identification command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

  (31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (32) The display device that displays the setting value being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the third notification display device 69c, and may be the symbol display device 41, or a dedicated display device. Display device may be used.

  (33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. Further, the position corresponding to each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is set as the rotation operation position when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. It may be configured such that a set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated becomes the set value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

  (34) In the first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but they are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The configuration may be such a configuration that they are arranged side by side, that they are arranged side by side at an angle, or that they are arranged side by side so as to form two stages above and below. Further, although the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side in the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, they may be provided in a vertical direction, and may be oblique. May be arranged side by side, or may be arranged side by side so as to have two upper and lower stages. Further, in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as the display devices for displaying the game history management results.

  (35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, history information (hereinafter referred to as variation target history information) used to calculate a parameter whose normal value varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. ) And history information (hereinafter referred to as non-variation target history information) used to calculate a parameter whose normal value does not vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, in different areas in the history memory 117. It may be configured to be stored in. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area in which the history information of the change target is stored in the history memory 117 is “0”. On the other hand, the area for storing the history information of the non-variation target in the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" while being cleared. Thereby, the calculation of the parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately performed even after the setting value is changed, and the normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be improved. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-21st embodiment.

  (36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be specified in advance in the main RAM 65. Even in this case, the areas corresponding to the stack areas 222 and 224 are specified in the main RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but the areas are specified beyond the storage capacity of the areas. When the information storage process is executed, the originally unscheduled information is written in the originally unscheduled area. Therefore, the main RAM 65 may be cleared to “0”.

  (37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, when the main RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are However, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", but instead, the clear processing of the main RAM 65 (step S105, In step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". . Further, in the clear process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency Although the support mode counter area 233 is cleared to “0”, the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

  (38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, an operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0", and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a non-specific control area. The operation for clearing the stack area 224 for specific control to "0" may be different from each other. For example, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the update button 68b is clicked. When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started during operation, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to selectively erase each piece of information. Further, in the configuration, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are provided. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to improve workability in the case of collectively erasing information in the areas 221 to 224 in the configuration that allows selective erasing as described above.

  (39) Similar to the nineteenth embodiment in the fifteenth to eighteenth and twentieth embodiments, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the work for the non-specific control. The saved information may be saved in the area 223 and returned to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be changed when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the main side is not returned when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is possible to restore the state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 to the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  (40) Processing for collecting game history information as processing corresponding to non-specific control in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, processing for calculating various parameters by using the collected history information, and Although the processing for notifying the calculation result is executed, only a part of these processing is executed as the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, and the other is executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control. May be Further, in addition to or instead of the process for collecting information on the game history, the process for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the process for notifying the calculation result, other than these processes The process may be executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control. For example, at least one of the illegality monitoring and the notification of the monitoring result may be executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  (41) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed in the main CPU63, the flag register of the main CPU63, Although neither the stack pointer nor the various registers are saved in the main side RAM 65, instead of this, the main side CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control to a process corresponding to the specific control. When returning, information of at least a part of the flag register, stack pointer, and various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65, and the saved information restarts the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be restored to the corresponding storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to carry over and use the information of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  (42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, various parameters are calculated in response to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area reaching 6000. The total number of game balls may be larger or smaller than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches 60000. In this case, the storage capacity necessary for storing the information on the game history increases, but the information on the game history is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 as in the twenty-first embodiment. With the configuration of storing, it becomes possible to flexibly cope with the increase of the storage capacity.

  (43) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the sixty-first to sixty-eighth parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history. At least a part of the parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter may be calculated.

  (44) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control is set. Also, not only the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. In this case, when a process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”.

  Further, when a process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, The normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

  In addition, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are set to “0. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are cleared, may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be protected.

  In addition, when the configuration of the above (43) is provided, when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the first Although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter in the above embodiment is deleted, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are deleted. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

  (45) In the first to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the total number of discharged game balls discharged from the game area PA is used to calculate various parameters, it is supplied to the game area PA. The configuration may be such that the total supply number of game balls is used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor is provided so as to detect a game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and has reached the game area PA, and the game ball supplied to the game area PA based on the detection result of the detection sensor. The number of pieces may be measured. In this configuration, it is not necessary to measure the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 24a, and thus the outlet detection sensor 48a may not be provided.

  (46) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, at least part of the information on the various registers and stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is stored in the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may be configured to be saved by a load instruction. In this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when saving the information in the stack areas 222 and 224. Further, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be restored to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. Also in this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when the information is restored from the stack areas 222 and 224.

  (47) When the set value updating process is executed in each of the above-described embodiments, the corresponding notification may be performed by any of the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly understand that the setting value updating process is being executed.

  (48) In each of the above-described embodiments, the history that the set value is newly set may be stored in the main RAM 65. Further, the history that the set value is newly set may be stored in the RAM provided in the voice emission control device 81. In this case, every time the set value update process is completed, a command including information about the set value set in the set value update process is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, and the sound emission control device 81 81, each time the command is received, the information indicating that the set value is newly set and the information indicating the set value at that time are cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81. When a predetermined operation is performed in the configuration, the setting history of the setting values cumulatively stored in the RAM of the voice emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  (49) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the set value is newly set in the set value updating process, the information stored in the payout control device 77 indicating the number of game balls to be paid out is not erased. However, instead of this, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out may be deleted. Also, if the set value update process has been executed but the set value has not been changed, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out is not erased, and if the set value has been changed, the payout plan is to be paid out. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

  (50) When the set value update process is executed in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, but the set value is not changed, the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 are not cleared to "0" and the set value is When changed, at least a part of each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 may be cleared to "0". For example, when the set value is changed, the area other than the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control may be cleared to "0".

  (51) Even in the situation where the processing for confirming the setting value in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 87) is being executed by the main CPU 63 in the above twenty-second to twenty-fifth embodiments, it is in the profit of the game. The movable object involved may be continuously operated. For example, a V-zone and a non-V zone are provided in the ball-entering means that can enter the ball in the opening / closing execution mode, and the game ball entered in the ball-entering means is distributed to either the V-zone or the non-V-zone. In the configuration including the distribution member, the operation of the distribution member may be continued even when the process for confirming the set value is executed in the setting confirmation process. In this case, even if an attempt is made to erroneously generate a situation in which the process for confirming the set value is executed in the process for confirming the setting and the operation of the sorting member is stopped, it is possible to disable it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned distributing member, a ball entering the ball entering means is a movable object that continues to operate even when the process for confirming the set value is executed in the process for confirming the setting. The game ball to either the advantageous opening that will generate a round game after the game ball enters the ball or the discharge port that discharges the game ball that entered the ball entry means without entering the advantage ball A distribution member that distributes the

  (52) In the twenty-second to twenty-fifth embodiments, at least one of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be a target of information abnormality monitoring. In this case, even if it is specified that the information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control are provided. By setting the configuration in which 224 is not cleared to "0", a situation in which the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" based on the occurrence of information abnormality is prevented. It becomes possible to do.

  (53) In the above twenty-second to twenty-fifth embodiments, there is information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which all the monitoring of whether or not it has occurred is executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, the configuration for clearing each area 221 to 224 to “0” when an information abnormality occurs may be performed by a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  (54) Instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission controller 81 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main controller 60. The device 82 may control the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (55) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

  Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, the reel is started to rotate by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time elapses, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage section and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading apparatus. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, in which the reel starts to rotate.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever is history information. It may be configured such that the actual winning probability of each winning combination is calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history thereof is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special game state to the total number of exhausted games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by an external device, or the gaming machine itself may be informed of the result of calculation of various parameters. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of stages of setting states such as “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the winning probability in the lottery process of the winning combination is changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to the handling of history information when the setting of the setting state is newly set or the setting value is changed, the calculation of various parameters, and the handling of repeated change. ..

  (56) The characteristic configurations of the first to twenty-fifth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment may be combined. Even if the characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment are combined. Well, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twenty-first embodiment may be combined, and the second configuration may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twenty-second embodiment may be combined. Further, in addition to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to twenty-fifth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configuration in the other mode may be applied in an arbitrary combination.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configuration corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
An information erasing unit that erases at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit (third part). In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management-side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management-side CPU 112 in the sixth embodiment. A function of executing the process of S2308, a function of executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic A1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted under the condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the new setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed can be suitably performed. ..

Feature A2. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. The function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability of the assignment-corresponding result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the characteristic A2, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic A1 described above, the history storage means can appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed. It is possible to adjust the content.

  Features A3. The information erasing means erases all the history information stored in the history storing means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The game machine according to A1 or A2.

  According to the characteristic A3, all the history information stored in the history storage means is erased when the setting value to be used is newly set, so that the setting value to be used is set. It is possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event based on the timing when the new event is performed.

  Features A4. The information erasing means erases a part of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

  According to the characteristic A4, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information unnecessary for the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event thereafter is deleted, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event thereafter is performed. It becomes possible to leave necessary history information. As a result, it is possible to preferably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event after the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed.

Features A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (a history indicating that an open / close execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information changes according to the set value. Information) and second history information (history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) that does not change according to the set value.
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storing means, under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the second history information stored in the history storage means is left.

  According to the characteristic A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event in which the occurrence probability changes according to the setting value is erased, and the occurrence probability is set to the set value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not fluctuate according to is not deleted. As a result, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed is succeeded after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information is generated. It is possible to delete the first history information, which is not preferable in specifying the frequency, when the setting of the setting value is newly performed. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information is specified by not deleting the second history information even if the setting value to be used is newly set. Since it is possible to secure a large number of second history information, it is possible to accurately specify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Features A6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. The function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
It is a configuration in which the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the grant of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to a game ball being discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  According to the characteristic A6, since the award probability of the privilege changes depending on the set value, the first history information should be deleted when the setting of the set value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the privilege grant frequency under the condition of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area does not change according to the set value, the second history information is not erased even if the set value to be used is newly set. It is possible to accurately specify the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  Features A7. At least the history information is deleted when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and when the history storage means stores a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is characterized by erasing a part.

  According to the characteristic A7, when the predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage means in the predetermined amount or more, the history information is not erased even if the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to prevent the history information stored in the history storage means from being repeatedly erased even if a new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where no game is played.

  Feature A8. Corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means Information deriving means for deriving the mode information (the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7.

  According to the characteristic A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is provided with the configuration of the characteristic A1 and at least one condition is that a new setting value to be used is set. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed is grasped. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, further comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation unit.

  According to the characteristic A9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature A10. The amusement machine according to feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the characteristic A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped with reference to the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived from the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Features A11. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is means for executing a special process when the setting value to be used by the setting means is generated a predetermined number of times under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to the feature A9 or A10, which is provided with a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, and a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A11, the set value is set in a situation in which the game is not played so that the form information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the form information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when the predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. ..

  According to the characteristic A12, the aspect information is derived when the predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage means in a predetermined amount or more, so that the aspect information can be prevented from being unnecessarily derived. ..

  Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. Before the setting of the set value is performed in the case where the predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage unit after the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is erased.

  According to the characteristic A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the setting value is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that has been displayed is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Features A14. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means,
When the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit to the release condition being satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit and the first history storage unit. Means for storing in both of the second history storage means (function for executing the processing of step S2604 in the management side CPU 112);
When the predetermined event occurs in a period other than the predetermined period, a unit for storing the corresponding history information on the side set to be stored in the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit. (Function of executing the process of step S2603 in the management CPU 112),
Equipped with
The information erasing unit erases the history information stored in the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that has been set as the storage target until then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13.

  According to the characteristic A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the history information is stored before the setting. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, the effect can be brought about only by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

  Feature A15. Using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, which is provided with information deriving means (function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the characteristic A15, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to the new setting of the setting value, the aspect using the history information It is possible to appropriately derive the information.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features A1 to A15. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Equipped with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage unit before the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed by the setting unit to set the setting value to be used. A gaming machine, which is stored and held in the history storage means even after being played.

  According to the characteristic B1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is not erased but stored and retained. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage means, and accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information.

  Feature B2. The history storage execution means stores the history information corresponding to the setting value to be used in the history storage means when the setting value is set by the setting means. In the embodiment, the management side CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1307, and in the seventh embodiment the management side CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2408). Machine.

  According to the feature B2, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the setting value to be used is newly set in a configuration in which the history information is stored and retained without being erased. The history information corresponding to that is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed and history information after the setting.

  Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the storage executing unit at the time of setting stores information corresponding to the set setting value in the history storage unit as the history information. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of corresponding history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to a plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3.

  According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each set value, it is possible to store the history information separately for each set value.

  Feature B5. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the set value for which the setting is made is a means for storing the history information thereafter (management side) (A function of executing the process of step S2406 in the CPU 112) The gaming machine according to feature B4.

  According to the feature B5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is set as the storage target of the history information thereafter, so that each setting value is set. It is possible to distinguish and store the history information.

  Feature B6. Information derivation means (display output processing in the management-side CPU 112) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the correspondence history storage means that is the storage target The game machine according to feature B5.

  According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the history information is stored separately for each set value, it becomes possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. The function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6, wherein the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
After setting the setting value to be used by the setting means, the history information is not erased until at least a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means. (Function of executing the processing of step S2506 and step S2605 to step S2609 in the management-side CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic C1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

  Feature C2. The post-setting correspondence means sets the set value when the predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means after the set value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased before being performed.

  According to the characteristic C2, when the history storage means stores a specific amount of history information that enables the management result of the game history to be specified in a predetermined period after the setting value is newly set. The history information stored in the history storage means before the new setting of the set value is performed is deleted. This makes it possible to prevent wasteful history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means,
When the predetermined event occurs, a means for storing the history information corresponding to the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as a storage target (step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112). Function that executes the processing of
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the predetermined amount or more is stored (management side CPU 112). Function for executing the process of step S2604 in)
Equipped with
After the setting, the corresponding means is
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the processing of step S2607 in the management side CPU 112) when the specific amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for erasing the history information of the side that has been set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the specific amount or more is stored (step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112). Function that executes the processing of
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the history information is stored before the setting. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, the effect can be brought about only by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

  Feature C4. Using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine described in Feature C3, which is provided with information derivation means (function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the characteristic C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to the new setting of the setting value, the aspect using the history information It is possible to appropriately derive the information.

Feature C5. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. The function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the probability of being the granting correspondence result in the granting determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the characteristic C5, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features C1 to C5. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
Special execution means for executing special processing on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in a special situation (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112) A function of executing processing, a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of making negative determination in step S2106 of the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic D1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, the special process is executed on the condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. This makes it possible to deal with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

  Feature D2. Characteristic D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing under at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set a certain number of times or more in the special situation. Gaming machine described in.

  According to the characteristic D2, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation, the special process is not executed when the execution frequency is less than the specific frequency. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special process from being executed until the regular worker performs new setting of the set value less than the specific number of times in the special situation.

  Feature D3. The special execution means, as the special situation, a situation in which a game is not being performed after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, or the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. In a situation in which a game of not less than a predetermined standard has not been played since the game was performed, it is possible to execute the special process with at least one condition that the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means has been executed. The gaming machine described in the characteristic D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, special processing is executed when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed in a situation where a game is not being played or a situation where a game is not substantially being played, If the act is done, it becomes possible to deal with it.

  Feature D4. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

  According to the characteristic D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. As a result, when a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation, it is possible to prompt the user to deal with it.

Feature D5. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means Information deriving means for deriving the mode information (the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means, triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used. Derived. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature D6. The special execution means, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in the special situation, as the special processing, derives the aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that the game is not performed.

  According to the characteristic D6, even if a new setting value to be used is set, if the setting is performed in an unfavorable situation, the aspect information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived.

  Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, characterized by further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the characteristic D7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage unit is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the characteristic D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped on the basis of the timing at which the new setting of the setting value is made. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived from the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
Characteristic D7 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a number of times exceeding the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the game machine described in D8.

  According to the characteristic D9, the set value is set in a situation in which the game is not played so that the aspect information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. The function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, in which the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the feature D10, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means Information deriving means for deriving the mode information (the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic E1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means, triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used. Derived. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation unit.

  According to the feature E2, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the characteristic E3, since it is possible to store a plurality of aspect information in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped on the basis of the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived from the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is means for executing a special process when the setting value to be used by the setting means is generated a predetermined number of times under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to the feature E2 or E3, which is provided with a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment).

  According to the characteristic E4, the set value is set in a situation in which the game is not played so that the manner information is not stored in the manner information storage means so that the manner information obtained by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is left. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit. ..

  According to the feature E5, the aspect information is derived when the predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so that the aspect information can be prevented from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. The function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features E1 to E6. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions related to the characteristic group A, the characteristic group B, the characteristic group C, the characteristic group D, and the characteristic group E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means,
An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information.
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The grant determination means has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode so that the probability of the grant-corresponding result is relatively high or low, as the mode of the grant determination.
A game machine characterized in that the probability of being the assignment correspondence result varies at least in the low probability mode according to the set value.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result in at least the low probability mode in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value. As a result, even in the case of a single gaming machine, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode does not change according to the set value.

  According to the feature F2, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The amusement machine according to the characteristic F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

  According to the feature F3, the probability of the granting correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the selection mode of the privilege is not changed according to the set value. Can be restricted to situations in the low probability mode.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the characteristic F group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the eleventh to the tenth information display means) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management-side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63). Function for executing the processing of step S3101, step S3103 and step S3109 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, step S3201, step S3202, step S3204 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment. And a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic G1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the aspect information but also the display corresponding to the different information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  Features G2. Characteristic G1 characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display unit is distinguished from a period during which a display corresponding to the different information is performed by the information display unit. Amusement machine.

  According to the feature G2, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the information display means by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the information display means. Can be specified.

  Features G3. The second information display control means displays the display corresponding to the different information by controlling the display of the information display means so as to be a display mode different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or G2, which is characterized by being performed.

  According to the feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed on the information display means. It will be possible.

  Features G4. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to fourteenth, respectively) capable of performing a plurality of types of displays. In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, characterized in that a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) are provided.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing the display corresponding to the aspect information using the plurality of individual information display means. In addition, the presence of the plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode between when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. ..

  Features G5. When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the different information, the second information display control means does not become a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201, second notification display device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Characteristic G4 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Gaming machine described in.

  According to the characteristic G5, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Features G6. The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the specific individual information display means (the first individual information display means that is in a display state when the aspect information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means). The third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification in the thirteenth embodiment. Display device 204) for display,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine described in Feature G5.

  According to the feature G6, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the specific individual information display unit can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Further, even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is provided with the structure of the feature G5. When a predetermined individual information display means displays a display corresponding to different information, it is in a non-display state, so that it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means.

  Features G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, characterized in that the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature G7, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and therefore, the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the other information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where it is displayed.

  Features G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and even when the display of the mode information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G5 to G7, characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained at.

  According to the feature G8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. With this, regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  Features G9. The second information display control means is one specific individual information display means among the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, eleventh and twelfth). Any of the features G5 to G8 characterized in that the fourth notification display device 204) displays a display corresponding to the different information and makes the remaining individual information display means in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G9, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only one individual information display unit is in the display state, so that it is easy to understand whether or not the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Become.

Feature G10. A plurality of the individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end of the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction in the predetermined direction.

  According to the characteristic G10, since the single individual information display means for displaying the different information is present at the end portion in the predetermined direction, it is grasped whether or not the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Easier to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means and is an individual information display means of a type display target (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh notification display device). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are configured to perform a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means. The individual information display means of the result display target that is a part of the second display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the first information display device 69c in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments. The display corresponding to the contents of the aspect information to be displayed is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the individual information display unit of the type display target.

  According to the feature G11, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the individual information display unit for the type display target performs the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed and the individual information display for the result display target. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information that is the display target. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display means of the type display target is in the non-display state, which means that the type display non-display state corresponds to the different information. It becomes easier to understand if the different information is displayed.

Features G12. The information display unit has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by combining the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, among the plurality of unit light emitting units, to a light emitting state. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G11, which is a combination.

  According to the feature G12, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display corresponding to the different information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that is in the light emitting state to the light emitting state to perform the display corresponding to the different information. In order to diversify, it is possible to prevent the contents of display corresponding to the aspect information from being restricted as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. This makes it possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units which are in the light emitting state.

Features G13. There are a plurality of display modes of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to the feature G12, wherein the plurality of unit light emitting units does not have a unit light emitting unit that is not in a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature G13, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light-emitting units of an arbitrary combination are set to the light emitting state, so that the mode corresponding to the diversification of the display corresponding to the mode information can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the contents of the display corresponding to the information from being restricted as much as possible.

Features G14. Specific individual information display means that is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204, thirteenth in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments). In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the different information, the second information display control means does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201, second notification display device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or a game machine according to G13.

  According to the characteristic G14, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G15. A setting means (a function for executing a set value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

  According to the feature G15, it becomes possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means causes the display of information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature G16, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying the mode information as the display means for displaying the set value being changed.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be performed as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature G17, it becomes possible to use the information display means for displaying the aspect information as the display means for performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

  Features G18. When the second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the abnormal state in the situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, the second information display control means causes the display corresponding to that the abnormal state has not occurred. The gaming machine described in G17.

  According to the characteristic G18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features G1 to G18. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the eleventh to the tenth information display means) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management-side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63). Function for executing the processing of step S3101, step S3103 and step S3109 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, step S3201, step S3202, step S3204 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment. And a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Equipped with
The information display unit has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by combining the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, among the plurality of unit light emitting units, to a light emitting state. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A game machine characterized by being a combination.

  According to the characteristic H1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the aspect information but also the display corresponding to the different information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  In addition, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light-emitting unit that can be brought into the light emitting state is brought into the light emitting state and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the aspect information. For this purpose, it is possible to prevent the contents of the display corresponding to the aspect information from being restricted as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. This makes it possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units which are in the light emitting state.

Features H2. There are a plurality of display modes of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to the feature H1, wherein there is no unit light emitting unit that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed in the plurality of unit light emitting units. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light-emitting units of an arbitrary combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information, It is possible to prevent the contents of the display corresponding to the information from being restricted as much as possible.

Features H3. Specific individual information display means that is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204, thirteenth in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments). In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the different information, the second information display control means does not become a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201, second notification display device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

  According to the characteristic H3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

  Features H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the characteristic H4, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the other information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where it is displayed.

  Features H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and even when the display of the mode information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to the feature H3 or H4, characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained at.

  According to the characteristic H5, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. With this, regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

Features H6. A setting means (a function for executing a set value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

  According to the feature H6, it is possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Features H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the second information display control means causes the display of information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature H7, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying the mode information as the display means for displaying the set value being changed.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
First information display control means (management side) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. A function of executing display processing in the CPU 112),
Second information display control means (a function of executing processing for abnormality display in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic I1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. In addition, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  Feature I2. When the second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state has not occurred. The gaming machine described in Feature I1.

  According to the characteristic I2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

  Feature I3. Characteristic I1 or I2 characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display unit is distinguished from a period during which a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display unit. The game machine described.

  According to the feature I3, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display means by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the information display means. Can be specified.

  Feature I4. The second information display control means displays the display corresponding to the abnormal state by controlling the display of the information display means so as to be a display mode different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or G2, which is characterized by being performed.

  According to feature I4, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. It will be possible.

  Feature I5. Features I1 to I4 characterized in that the information display unit includes a plurality of individual information display units (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) capable of displaying a plurality of types of information. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing the display corresponding to the aspect information using the plurality of individual information display means. In addition, the presence of the plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode between when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. ..

  Feature I6. When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the abnormal state, the second individual information display control means does not become a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) is in a non-display state.

  According to the feature I6, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. With this, only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. Is possible.

Feature I7. The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is to be performed, the specific individual information display means (the first individual information display means to be in the display state when the aspect information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means). The third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) to a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine described in Feature I6.

  According to the feature I7, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed on the specific individual information display means can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Further, even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, the display does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is provided with the configuration of the characteristic I7. When a predetermined individual information display unit displays a display corresponding to an abnormal state, it is in a non-display state, and therefore it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the plurality of individual information display units.

  Feature I8. The game machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when performing display corresponding to the aspect information.

  According to the characteristic I8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display unit is in the non-display state, which corresponds to the abnormal state. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where it is displayed.

  Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and even when the display of the mode information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained at.

  According to the feature I9, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means, irrespective of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the eleventh to the tenth information display means) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management-side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and the information display means does not display even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed. A game machine characterized by being kept in a state.

  According to the feature J1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the aspect information regardless of the timing when the information display unit is confirmed.

  Features J2. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to fourteenth, respectively) capable of performing a plurality of types of displays. In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing the display corresponding to the aspect information using the plurality of individual information display means.

  Features J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed, the display state is changed. Maintained. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information.

  Features J4. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means, which is a type display target individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a and the eleventh display device). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are configured to perform a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means. The individual information display means of the result display target that is a part of the above (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, in the first to fourteenth embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, characterized in that a display corresponding to the contents of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

  According to the feature J4, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the individual information display unit for the type display target performs the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed and the individual information display for the result display target. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information that is the display target.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) ),
The history storage execution means is a means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation (function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63). ) Is provided with a gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic K1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, since history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in a situation where it is not desirable to store history information. ..

  Features K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction status can occur as a status from when supply of operating power to the history storage executing means is started to when a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the characteristic K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the operation check immediately after the start of supplying the operating power from being stored as history information.

Features K3. A means for setting the restriction status when the supply of the operating power to the history storage executing means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the limited condition when the supply of operating power to the history storage executing means is started and the limiting condition is not satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3621 in the main CPU 63) When,
A gaming machine according to feature K2, which is provided with.

  According to the characteristic K3, there are a case where the restriction condition is set and a case where the restriction condition is not set depending on whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction status from being set as necessary.

  Features K4. The restriction situation is characterized in that it can occur as a situation after the supply of the operating power to the history storage executing means is started and until the number of discharged game balls from the game area becomes a predetermined reference number or more. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

  According to the characteristic K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of discharged game balls from the game area reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number after the supply of the operating power is started.

Features K5. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in history storage means (normal counter area 231, opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233). History storing execution means for storing (a function of executing a normal ball management process in the main CPU 63, a ball management process in the open / close execution mode, and a ball management process in the high frequency support mode);
Information derivation means (function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means,
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the information deriving means does not derive the mode information in a restricted situation.

  According to the characteristic K5, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the restricted situation, the aspect information is not derived even if a predetermined event occurs, so it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived in a situation where it is not desirable to derive the aspect information. ..

  Features K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the restricted situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of the operating power to the history storage execution means is started to when a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the characteristic K6, it is possible to prevent the aspect information using the history information based on the occurrence of the predetermined event by the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power from being derived.

  Features K7. The restriction situation is characterized in that it can occur as a situation after the supply of the operating power to the history storage executing means is started and until the number of discharged game balls from the game area becomes a predetermined reference number or more. The gaming machine described in K5 or K6.

  According to the characteristic K7, it becomes possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived from the start of the supply of the operating power until the number of discharged game balls from the game area reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features K1 to K7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions related to the characteristic G group, the characteristic H group, the characteristic I group, the characteristic J group, and the characteristic K group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. A function for executing the processing of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, which saves predetermined information, which is information of a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65), 16th In the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a step of the main CPU63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function for executing the processing of S4602, which is the master CP in the nineteenth embodiment. Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the ability to perform) in 63,
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return execution unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and A function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and a processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. Function, the function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature L1, when the first predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is executed, or the second predetermined process is executed, the result is stored in the internal storage means. At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is finished. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature L2, since only a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means, the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L3. The internal storage means includes a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and And a register other than the IY register),
The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined processing but not store information in the second storage area,
The game machine according to feature L2, wherein the save executing means saves the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storing means.

  According to the feature L3, when the second predetermined process is executed from the condition in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage means. At, the information in the first storage area, which is the storage target of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process, while the internal process is performed in the predetermined storage unit. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information in the storage means.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the evacuation executing means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature L4, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed Information is saved in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started and save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The evacuation executing means is
In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit, is changed from the state in which the first predetermined process is being performed to the state in which the second predetermined process is being performed. Means for evacuating to the first predetermined storage area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment); ,
The second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, when the second predetermined processing is executed from the state in which the first predetermined processing is executed, In the second predetermined storage area (function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, in steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment). A function of executing the processing, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 in the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment).
A gaming machine according to feature L4, which is characterized by including:

  According to the feature L5, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing. With this, it becomes possible to save at a timing suitable for each information stored in the internal storage means, and the processing for saving the information is distributed and executed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

  Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature L7, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area And at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in one of the work areas. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

  Feature L8. The game machine according to feature L7, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature L8, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the work area, so that the information can be saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. Become.

Feature L9. In the first predetermined storage area, information can be stored and information can be read when the first predetermined process is executed, and information can be read when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to store information,
In the second predetermined storage area, information can be stored and information can be read when the second predetermined processing is executed, and information can be read when the first predetermined processing is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L8, which is characterized in that information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature L9, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature L10, the save destinations of the predetermined information can be aggregated, and the process configuration for saving the predetermined information and the process configuration for restoring the predetermined information can be simplified.

  Feature L11. The game machine according to feature L10, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature L11, since the predetermined information is saved in the work area, it is possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation executing means is configured to execute the internal storage means when the second predetermined processing is executed from the status in which the first predetermined processing is executed, or when the second predetermined processing is executed. The gaming machine according to feature L11, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for saving specific information, which is a part of information stored in the stack area, in the stack area. .

  According to the feature L12, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. This makes it possible to disperse and save the information stored in the internal storage means in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature L13. The gaming machine according to feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature L13, the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage means is saved. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature L14. Information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed Is a fixed information structure,
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L13, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target for saving by the saving executing means.

  According to the feature L14, since it is not necessary to secure the capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage means, the capacity of the predetermined storage means can be suppressed. Even if the stack pointer information is not saved as described above, the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed In this case, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information. Therefore, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started without saving the information of the stack pointer as described above. It is possible.

  Feature L15. A means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after ending the second predetermined processing (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, a seventeenth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment). ..

  According to the feature L15, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before or after the second predetermined process is started when or after the second predetermined process is ended.

  Feature L16. When the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed or the second predetermined processing is executed, the stack pointer is set to the second predetermined processing. Means for setting corresponding second correspondence start information (function of executing step S3901 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, function of executing step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, In the eighteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S4601). The gaming machine according to the feature L14 or L15.

  According to the feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature L17, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when the processing for executing the above is executed.

Feature L18. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event generated when a game is executed is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature L17.

  According to the feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature L19. The second predetermined process execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature L18, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

  According to the feature L19, by using the history information stored in the history storage area to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period, management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

  Feature L20. The gaming machine according to feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (a calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature L20, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features L1 to L20, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Features M1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. Evacuation executing means for evacuating predetermined information, which is information of a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, seventeenth embodiment) Then, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step S4602 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the step S4701 and the step of the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment. Function for executing the processing of S4703),
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return executing unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (step S3910 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S3915, a function of executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means by a load command.

  According to the feature M1, when the first predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is executed, or the second predetermined process is executed, the result is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is ended. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. When the state in which the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the state in which the second predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information is saved in the predetermined storage means by the load instruction. .. This makes it possible to save the predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Features M2. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature M1, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature M2, since the save destination of the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is the work area, the information is saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. It becomes possible.

Features M3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation executing means is configured to execute the internal storage means when the second predetermined processing is executed from the status in which the first predetermined processing is executed, or when the second predetermined processing is executed. The game machine according to the feature M2, further comprising a unit (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) that saves specific information that is a part of the information stored in the stack area. .

  According to the feature M3, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. This makes it possible to disperse and save the information stored in the internal storage means in the work area and the stack area.

  Features M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature M4, the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage means is saved. It is possible to prevent it.

Features M5. The work area is
A first work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of the features M2 to M4, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second work area.

  According to the feature M5, since the first work area and the second work area are provided in the work area, the storage destination of the information in the work area is clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed Information is saved in the second work area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and also to save the information without using the first work area.

Features M6. In the first work area, information can be stored and information can be read when the first predetermined process is executed, and information can be read when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to store information,
Although information can be stored and information can be read from the second work area when the second predetermined process is executed, and information can be read when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature M5, which is characterized in that information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature M6, the first work area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second work area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. ..

Features M7. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. Evacuation executing means for evacuating predetermined information, which is information of a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, seventeenth embodiment) Then, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step S4602 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the step S4701 and the step of the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment. Function for executing the processing of S4703),
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return executing unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (step S3910 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S3915, a function of executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the characteristic M7, when the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is ended. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

  In addition, when the second predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is being executed, one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage means is set. Then, the predetermined information is saved. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features M1 to M7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Features N1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
Equipped with
In the case where the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is a fixed information. A gaming machine to do.

  According to the feature N1, when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer when starting the predetermined process. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the stack pointer information. Also, when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so that the stack pointer information is not saved as described above. However, the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started can be restored.

  Features N2. A means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after ending the second predetermined processing (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, a seventeenth embodiment). In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S4509, and the eighteenth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63). ..

  According to the feature N2, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before or after the second predetermined process is started when the second predetermined process is ended or after the second predetermined process is ended.

  Features N3. Means for setting second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process to the stack pointer when the second predetermined process is executed from the state where the first predetermined process is being executed (fifteenth) In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the process of step S4601 in the main CPU63 in the eighteenth embodiment. The game machine according to the feature N1 or N2.

  According to the feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Features N4. At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. A function for executing the processing of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, which saves predetermined information, which is information of a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65), 16th In the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a step of the main CPU63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function for executing the processing of S4602, which is the master CP in the nineteenth embodiment. Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the ability to perform) in 63,
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return execution unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and A function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and a processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. Function, the function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment).
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target for saving by the saving executing means.

  According to the feature N4, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means. At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. In addition, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is finished. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. Further, since the information of the stack pointer is not the object of saving, it is not necessary to secure the capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Even if the stack pointer information is not saved as described above, the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed In this case, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information. Therefore, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started without saving the information of the stack pointer as described above. It is possible.

Features N5. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature N4, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature N5, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed Information is saved in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started and save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Features N6. The first predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to remember information about things,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the first predetermined process is executed. The amusement machine according to the feature N5, which is incapable of storing information on things.

  According to the feature N6, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features N1 to N6. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature O group>
Feature O1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least a part of the storage in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. First state setting means (main CPU 63 performs steps S4803 to S4808) for setting the state of a predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register), which is an area, to a predetermined state. Function to execute)
A second state setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state when or after the second predetermined process is finished;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature O1, in the case where the second predetermined process is executed from the condition in which the first predetermined process is executed, or the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means. Is set to the predetermined state, and when the second predetermined process is finished or after the second predetermined process is finished, the state of the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state again. Accordingly, the state of the predetermined storage area can be set to the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. From the above, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

  According to the characteristic O2, since the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified. Is possible.

  Features O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

  According to the characteristic O3, since the predetermined storage area is set to the state in which “0” is cleared as the predetermined state, the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified.

  Features O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a partial storage area in the internal storage means.

  According to the characteristic O4, since only a part of the storage area of the internal storage means is set to the predetermined state, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the predetermined state.

Features O5. The internal storage means includes at least the predetermined storage area and a separate storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and register other than IY register).
The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing but not store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means are configured not to change the state of the separate storage area.

  According to the characteristic O5, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage means. At, a predetermined storage area for storing information is set to a predetermined state. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by the first predetermined processing from affecting the second predetermined processing. Moreover, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is started does not affect the process after the second predetermined process is completed. It will be possible.

  Features O6. Information of the predetermined storage area before the setting of the predetermined state by the first state setting means is information that is not used after the second predetermined processing is finished, O1 to O5. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the characteristic O6, even when the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is terminated. It is possible to prevent the processing after the processing from being affected.

Features O7. A part stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed Save execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for saving the predetermined information (information of the flag register), which is information of the above, in a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65),
Return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is ended (function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O6, characterized in that

  According to the characteristic O7, when the first predetermined process is being executed, the second predetermined process is being executed, or the second predetermined process is being executed, the result is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is executed, and the information necessary for the subsequent execution of the first predetermined process is rewritten. It becomes possible not to. Further, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is ended. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Features O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature O8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when the processing for executing the above is executed.

Features O9. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event generated when a game is executed is stored. And a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to feature O9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature O10. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature O9, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

  According to the characteristic O10, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, thereby managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. It is possible to grasp the result.

  Feature O11. The gaming machine according to feature O10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the characteristic O11, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features O1 to O11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature P1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature P2, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when the processing for executing the above is executed.

  Feature P3. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event generated when the game is executed is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature P2.

  According to the feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature P4. The second predetermined process execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). (A function of executing the process of). The gaming machine according to feature P3.

  According to the characteristic P4, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, thereby managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. It is possible to grasp the result.

  Feature P5. The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature P5, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P6. In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit, is changed from the state in which the first predetermined process is being performed to the state in which the second predetermined process is being performed. First saving means for saving to the first predetermined storage area (function of executing step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, execution of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) Function),
The second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, when the second predetermined processing is executed from the state in which the first predetermined processing is executed, In the fifteenth embodiment, a second evacuation unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a step S4502 in the main CPU63 in the seventeenth embodiment). (A function of executing the process of step S4507, a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of step S4701 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P5, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic P6, the first predetermined information which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing. With this, it becomes possible to save at a timing suitable for each information stored in the internal storage means, and the processing for saving the information is distributed and executed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

Feature P7. When the second predetermined process is ended or after the second predetermined process is ended, a first return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, a main return unit) that restores the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area to the internal storage unit. A function of executing the processing of step S3804 in the side CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment),
A second return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, a main unit in the fifteenth embodiment) that restores the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area to the internal storage unit when or after the second predetermined process is finished. A function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a function of executing step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function of executing processing, a function of executing processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in the feature P6, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic P7, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing ends, and the first predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area Since the second predetermined information is returned to the internal storage means, the state of the internal storage means can be returned to the state before the second predetermined processing is started.

  Feature P8. The game machine according to feature P6 or P7, wherein the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

  According to the characteristic P8, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

  Feature P9. The game machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of all registers of the internal storage means.

  According to the characteristic P9, the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is collectively saved, so that it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is written by a push instruction and information is read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature P9, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the characteristic P10, the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, the save destinations of the information in all the registers can be integrated, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring can be simplified.

  Feature P11. The gaming machine according to feature P10, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in the stack area.

  According to the feature P11, it is possible to save the information of all the registers while not using the work area.

  Feature P12. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information on a stack pointer of the internal storage means.

  According to the characteristic P12, it becomes possible to appropriately save the information of the stack pointer in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

  It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features P1 to P12. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions related to the characteristic L group, the characteristic M group, the characteristic N group, the characteristic O group, and the characteristic P group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to suitably perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. Control means (MPU 62) for executing various kinds of processing, and temporarily storing information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing;
History storage means (management RAM 241) that is provided as a chip separate from the control means and that can temporarily store information;
Equipped with
The control means stores history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event due to execution of the game in the history storage means (history storage execution means (normal entrance management process in the main CPU 63, A game machine having a function of executing a ball entrance management process in the opening / closing execution mode and a ball entrance management process in the high frequency support mode).

  According to the feature Q1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, since the history storage means is provided as a chip separate from the control means, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using a general-purpose control means.

  Features Q2. The game machine according to feature Q1, wherein the control means includes a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) that temporarily stores information when executing various types of processing.

  According to the feature Q2, in the configuration including not only the predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also the history storage means provided as a chip different from the control means, by storing the history information in the history storage means. It becomes possible to store and retain a large amount of history information.

  Features Q3. The gaming machine according to Feature Q2, wherein the control unit temporarily stores information in the predetermined storage unit when executing the process related to the history information.

  According to the feature Q3, in the configuration in which the history storage means for storing the history information is provided as a chip different from the control means, when the process related to the history information is executed, the predetermined storage means provided in the control means is used. Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed when performing the processing related to the history information from being extremely reduced.

  Features Q4. The control means uses the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (the processing of step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q3.

  According to the characteristic Q4, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived, and the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

  Features Q5. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature Q5, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features Q1 to Q5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the characteristic Q group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started, a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur, and the setting means becomes the use target. Situation generating means for setting a settable state in which setting values can be set (function of executing processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, or main CPU 63 in another embodiment). A function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in step S5503, a function of executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic R1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, in order to set the set value to be used, a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. Need to be As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R2. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 in another form). A function of executing the process of S5505, and a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
A feature R1 characterized in that the situation occurrence means specifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the opening grasping means has grasped that the opening / closing body is in an opened state. Gaming machine described in.

  According to the characteristic R2, the opening / closing body needs to be in an open state in order to set the setting value to be used. With this, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous, and as a result, it becomes possible to easily find the fraudulent act. ..

Feature R3. Another opening grasping means for grasping that the other opening / closing body (game machine main body 12) is in the opened state (a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). The function of executing the process of step S5506 in step S5506, and the function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
The situation occurrence means specifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening and closing body has grasped that the separate opening / closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine described in the feature R2.

  According to the characteristic R3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening / closing body but also open another opening / closing body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R4. The setting means performs at least one of selection of the setting value to be used and setting of the setting value to be used based on operation of a predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). It is a configuration to do,
The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening another opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R4, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless the opening / closing body that is different from the separate opening / closing body that is opened so that the predetermined operation means can be operated. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R5. The opening and closing body defines the game machine front side of the game area where the game ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, wherein the game area is opened in front of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the characteristic R5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening / closing body to open the game area in front of the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

  Feature R6. The situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred, based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) performs a predetermined operation with the setting key. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5.

  According to the feature R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion but also to generate an event other than that. is there. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R7. Based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, entry into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played is generated by the situation generation means, The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to R6, characterized in that one of the events is specified to occur.

  According to the characteristic R7, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only it is necessary to generate a predetermined game event that occurs when a game is played, but it is also different from that. It is necessary to generate the event of. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R8. The situation generating means is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by a ball detecting means (gate detecting sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area. , The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, wherein one of the plurality of events is specified to occur.

  According to the characteristic R8, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to enter the game ball into a predetermined ball entrance part and to generate an event other than that. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R9. A setting value informing unit (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for informing an informing unit of the setting value to be used set by the setting unit;
The set value notifying means notifies the notifying means of the set value to be used, which is set by the setting means, based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to R8, characterized in that the gaming machine is informed.

  According to the feature R9, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently confirm the set value. In addition, since the manager of the game hall only needs to cause the first event and the second event when setting the setting value to be used and confirming the setting value, the work is It becomes common, and it becomes easy to understand each work.

Feature R10. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
There are a plurality of events including both the predetermined operation by the setting key for the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) and another event different from the predetermined operation by the setting key for the setting key insertion section. On the basis of the occurrence, the situation generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, the state generating means is set so that the setting value to be used can be set by the setting means). A function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006, a function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a function of executing steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment. Function to execute processing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic R10, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion, but also to generate another event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R11. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 in another form). A function of executing the process of S5505, and a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
In the characteristic R10, the situation occurrence means specifies that the another event has occurred based on the fact that the opening grasping means has grasped that the opening / closing body is in an opened state. The game machine described.

  According to the feature R11, the opening / closing body needs to be in the open state in order to set the setting value to be used. With this, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous, and as a result, it becomes possible to easily find the fraudulent act. ..

Feature R12. Another opening grasping means for grasping that the other opening / closing body (game machine main body 12) is in the opened state (a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). The function of executing the process of step S5506 in step S5506, and the function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
The situation generating means identifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening / closing body has grasped that the separate opening / closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine described in the feature R11.

  According to the characteristic R12, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening / closing body but also to open another opening / closing body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R13. The setting means performs at least one of selection of the setting value to be used and setting of the setting value to be used based on operation of a predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). It is a configuration to do,
The gaming machine according to feature R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening a separate opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R13, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless the opening / closing body that is different from the separate opening / closing body that is opened to enable the operation of the predetermined operation means is opened. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R14. The opening and closing body defines the game machine front side of the game area where the game ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the game area is opened to the front of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the characteristic R14, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area to the front of the gaming machine by opening and closing the openable body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

  Feature R15. Based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, entry into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played is generated by the situation generation means, The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, characterized in that one of the events is specified to occur.

  According to the characteristic R15, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation with the setting key to the setting key insertion section is performed, but also the predetermined value generated when the game is performed. It is necessary to generate the game event of. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R16. The situation generating means is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by a ball detecting means (gate detecting sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area. , The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, wherein one of the plurality of events is specified to occur.

  According to the feature R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation with the setting key to the setting key insertion portion is performed, but also the game ball is inserted into the predetermined ball insertion portion. You need to make a ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R17. A setting value informing unit (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for informing an informing unit of the setting value to be used set by the setting unit;
The setting value notifying means is based on the fact that the predetermined operation is performed by the setting key with respect to the setting key insertion portion and a plurality of events including both of the different events have occurred, The gaming machine according to any one of the features R10 to R16, characterized in that the notification means notifies the setting value set by the above which is to be used.

  According to the characteristic R17, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of confirming the set value by fraud. In addition, the administrator of the game hall performs a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion part and causes another event whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value is confirmed. Since all that is required is to share the work, it becomes easier to understand each work.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features R1 to R17, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the characteristic R group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as in the above example, it is necessary to deal with the gaming machine illegally, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature S group>
Features S1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function of executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63);
Situation generating means for setting a setting possible state in which the setting value to be used can be set by the setting means (step S5003 to step S5006 and step S5401 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S5408, a function of executing the processes of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another mode, a process of steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment. Function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, and executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment. And ability),
A set value grasping unit that grasps whether or not the set value before the settable state and the set value set by the setting unit are the same (step S5017 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment). And a function of executing the processing of steps S5111-S5112, in another embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5611-S5612 in the main CPU 63).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature S1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable status and the set value set in the settable status are the same. This makes it possible to execute a process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable status. Therefore, when the setting value to be used is set, it is possible to generate a preferable situation for the setting result, and it is possible to appropriately perform the setting work of the setting value.

  Features S2. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping unit has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible state is the same as the setting value set by the setting unit, the same-time processing corresponding thereto is performed. The same-time means to be executed (function of executing step S5113 of the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function of executing step S5613 of the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine described in the feature S1.

  According to the feature S2, when the set values are the same across the settable states, the same-time processing is executed, so that it is possible to generate a preferable situation for the same set value. Become.

  Features S3. The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein the same time means performs a process for performing a notification corresponding to the fact that the set value has not been changed, as the same time process.

  According to the feature S3, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the set values are the same across the settable situations.

  Features S4. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping unit has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible state is different from the setting value set by the setting unit, the corresponding non-identical processing is executed. A non-identical means (function of executing step S5114 of the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function of executing step S5614 of the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) to be performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3.

  According to the feature S4, when the set values are not the same across the settable situations, the non-identical time process is executed, which makes it possible to generate a favorable situation with respect to the changed set values. Becomes

  Features S5. The non-identical time means, as the non-identical time process, executes a process for performing a notification corresponding to the change of the set value, the gaming machine according to the feature S4 ..

  According to the feature S5, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the setting value has been changed with the setting possible situation in between.

  Features S6. The situation generating means sets the setting based on the need to erase the information in the storage means for storing the setting value after the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S5, characterized in that the gaming machine is in a possible state.

  According to the feature S6, when it becomes necessary to erase the information in the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting is possible, so that the game is continued even though the setting value information is erased. It becomes possible not to. In this case, the configuration of the feature S1 is provided, and it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable situation and the set value set in the settable situation are the same. This makes it possible to execute a process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable status.

  Features S7. The set value is not changed based on the fact that the set value grasping unit has grasped that the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set by the setting unit. Means for performing notification corresponding to the fact (a function of executing the process of step S5113 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature S6, which is characterized by being provided.

  According to the feature S7, even if the setting status is changed due to the deletion of the information in the storage unit, the setting value is changed if the setting values are the same with the setting status being sandwiched therebetween. A notification corresponding to the absence is given. This makes it possible to inform the player that the set value has not been changed even if the setting is possible during the game, and even if the setting is possible during the game, the player is safe. It will be possible to continue playing the game.

Features S8. The situation generating means,
First situation generating means for bringing the setting possible situation based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means (in the twenty-second embodiment, step S5003 to the main CPU 63 in step S5003 to A function of executing the process of step S5006, a function of executing the processes of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another mode, a process of steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment. Function)
A second situation in which the setting possible state is established based on the need to erase the information in the storage unit that stores the setting value after the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started. Generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a twenty-fifth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The set value grasping means is set to the settable status regardless of whether the settable status is generated by the first status generating means or the settable status is generated by the second status generating means. 7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S7, wherein it is grasped whether or not the set value in the step 1 is the same as the set value set by the setting means.

  According to the feature S8, when it becomes necessary to erase the information in the storage means for storing the set value, the setting becomes possible, so that the game is continued despite the information on the set value being erased. It becomes possible not to. In this case, the same process as the case where the setting possible situation is set based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the control means is used, and the setting possible situation is accompanied by the deletion of the information in the storage means. When occurs, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable situation.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features S1 to S8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the characteristic group S, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to generate a suitable situation for the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and this point is still improved. There is room for

<Feature T group>
Feature T1. A control unit (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
First monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-fourth embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment),
Second monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-fourth embodiment. (Function of executing processing of steps S5809, S5810, S5812 and S5813 in the main CPU 63, function of executing processing of steps S6101, S6102, S6105 and S6106 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment) When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature T1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. The first predetermined process and the second predetermined process are performed by monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and by monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal. It is possible to specify whether or not each of the processes can be normally performed.

  Feature T2. The game according to the feature T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed by either one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Machine.

  According to the feature T2, the monitoring of whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal are performed by one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is executed collectively. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the monitoring of each storage area is distributed and executed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

  Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in the first predetermined processing.

  According to the feature T3, it is possible to collectively monitor whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitor whether the second predetermined storage area is normal by the first predetermined processing. Becomes

  Feature T4. Predetermined erasing means (in the 22nd embodiment, the main side in the twenty-second embodiment) that erases information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means specifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal. Function of executing the process of step S5410 in the CPU 63, function of executing the processes of step S5806, step S5811 and step S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, step S5906, step of the main CPU63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of S6103 and step S6107.

  According to the feature T4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined processing is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it.

  Feature T5. The predetermined erasing means erases information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means identifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T4, which is characterized by erasing information in the area.

  According to the characteristic T5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but also the second predetermined storage area is erased. As a result, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the second predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

  Feature T6. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal. The gaming machine described in T4 or T5.

  According to the feature T6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined processing is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it.

  Feature T7. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the first predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T6, which is characterized by erasing information in the area.

  According to the characteristic T7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but also the first predetermined storage area is erased. Thereby, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the first predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

  Feature T8. The process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in either one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, in any one of features T4 to T7. Game machine.

  According to the feature T8, the process of deleting the information in each predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormality is specified is collectively executed by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the erasing of information in each storage area is executed in a distributed manner by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

  Feature T9. The gaming machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein a process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in the first predetermined process.

  According to the feature T9, it is possible to collectively execute the processing of erasing the information in each predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormality is specified, by the first predetermined processing.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature T10, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when the processing for executing the above is executed.

  Feature T11. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening / closing execution mode counter area 232) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event generated when the game is executed is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature T10.

  According to feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Feature T12. The second predetermined process execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to the feature T11, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

  According to the characteristic T12, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, and the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

  Feature T13. The gaming machine according to feature T12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (a calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature T13, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features T1 to T13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. Any one or a plurality of configurations of R17, features S1 to S8, and features T1 to T13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the characteristic T group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage part. In addition, in the pachinko game machine, a configuration is also known that includes an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to suitably perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped pattern.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 12 ... Game machine main body, 14 ... Front door frame, 28 ... Launching operation device, 33 ... First operating port, 34 ... Second operating port, 35 ... Through gate, 49a ... Gate detection sensor, 63 ... Main CPU, 65 ... Main RAM, 68a ... Setting key insertion portion, 68b ... Update button, 68c ... Reset button, 69a ... First notification display device, 69b ... Second notification display device, 69c ... Third notification Display device, 112 ... Management CPU, 117 ... History memory, 171 ... Separate storage memory, 181-186 ... History memory for settings 1-6, 191 ... First history memory, 192 ... Second history Memory, 201 ... First notification display device, 201a to 201g ... Display segment, 202 ... Second notification display device, 202a to 202g ... Display segment, 203 ... Third notification display device, 2 4 ... 4th notification display device, 221, ... Work area for specific control, 222 ... Stack area for specific control, 223 ... Work area for non-specific control, 224 ... Stack area for non-specific control, 231 ... Normal Counter area, 232 ... Open / close execution mode counter area, 233 ... High frequency support mode counter area, 234 ... Calculation result storage area, 241 ... Management RAM.

Claims (1)

A control unit that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in the internal storage unit when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images